JP7357941B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as a jackpot in the determination, a jackpot game in which game media can be acquired is executed.

Then, when a jackpot game is being executed, the number of game media that can be obtained in the jackpot game may be displayed (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-181254 Publication

However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that sometimes display the number of game media that can be obtained, in order to improve the game's interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a game control means capable of executing a specific game in which game media can be obtained when a specific result is obtained in a predetermined determination;
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means capable of displaying predetermined information on a display section,
The game control means is
Depending on the end of a specific game, an advantageous gaming state may be created that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
When the advantageous gaming state is entered a predetermined number of times consecutively without the predetermined determination being executed in the normal gaming state after entering the advantageous gaming state in response to the end of a predetermined specific game. When the specific game is executed with the specific result in the last advantageous gaming state, the normal gaming state may be changed in response to the completion of the specific game,
The performance control means is
In each of the predetermined number of specific games executed before the predetermined specific game and the subsequent normal gaming state, the predetermined specific game and the subsequent specific games executed before the normal gaming state Executing a specific display on the display unit representing a predetermined number of specific games and the total number of game media that can be obtained;
The total number of game media represented by the specific display executed in the predetermined specific game and each of the predetermined number of specific games executed until the normal gaming state is reached is the same.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view illustrating the standby state of the movable plate body, (B) is a front view illustrating the moving state of the movable plate body, and (C) is a front view illustrating the rotating state of the movable plate body. It is a front view of display devices. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. (A) is a table showing general map related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special pattern related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of a reach determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 1st look-ahead determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a background image for probability variation, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of a background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening performance, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round performance, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending performance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation effect with no reach. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure variation performance until reaching the reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach, and is a continuation of Drawing 23. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. 26 is a diagram showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 26. It is a figure showing an example of a movable object production. It is a figure showing an example of operation performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a hold effect. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of production control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46. FIG. It is a front view of the game board unit according to the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the game control board side according to the first embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment, and (C) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. This is a configuration example of a small winning symbol type determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table for a non-limiter jackpot game according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table for a limiter jackpot game according to the first embodiment. (A) is an example of the configuration of a small winning game large prize opening control table, and (B) is an example of the configuration of a small winning game specific area control table. It is a time chart showing control details of a small winning game. It is a time chart for explaining a specific example of interference of the auxiliary game with respect to winning in the second big prize opening in the small winning game. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the gaming state setting table (normal gaming state) according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the gaming state setting table (time saving state) according to the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the main game flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. (A) is an example of the configuration of the general regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, and (B) is an example of the configuration of the special regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. (A) is a configuration example of an advantageous time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and (B) is a configuration example of an advantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a disadvantageous time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and (B) is a configuration example of a disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing concerning a 1st embodiment, and is a part after Step S220. 7 is a flowchart of special operation processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of special figure 2 judgment processing concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing specific examples of various effects related to the jackpot game. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a specific performance during the second small hit. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a specific performance during the first small hit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a specific example of a counter image. It is a diagram showing the overall performance flow of a special mode. This is a configuration example of each first special effect pattern determination related to jackpot fluctuations and small win fluctuations. It is a configuration example of each first special performance pattern determination related to loss variation. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a first special effect. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a first special effect. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a first special effect. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a first special effect. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a first special effect.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characteristic parts of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In addition, in the following, in order to simplify the description, by writing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. for the symbol or code will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine Pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko game machine PY refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko game machine PY. Furthermore, "front" refers to the direction from the pachinko machine PY approaching the player facing the pachinko machine PY, and "backward" refers to the direction approaching the pachinko machine PY from the player facing the pachinko machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU inside. The gaming machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 that is fixed to the gaming parlor, an inner frame 22 that is attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the gaming board unit YU is attached, and a front frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. A door 23 is provided.

The outer circumferential shapes of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 when viewed from the front are approximately the same. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m having a large substantially vertically rectangular opening formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY cannot visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. Note that a transparent glass plate may be used as the transparent plate 23t instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed through the transparent plate 23t from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The handle 72k can be rotated clockwise, and the amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the amount of force applied to the game ball (shooting strength) to make the game ball launch. There is. Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operating portion of the first performance button 40k that visibly protrudes from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is shaped into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper tray 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A is formed for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. Further, on the upper surface of the lower tray 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A is provided for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Furthermore, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 that protrude forward are provided above, on the right side, and on the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, are arranged facing downward and arranged in the left and right direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. Further, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower part of the right side decorative body 32. The operation part of the second performance button 41k is shaped like a rod. Furthermore, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right side decorative body 32 to the right front portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left side decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. 1. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decoration body 61 is formed to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decoration body 61, there is an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and an outer rail 62 between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61.

On the front surface of the game board 1, an area surrounded by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, etc. forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a firing area 7 through which the fired game balls can pass to head toward the gaming area 6.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nails are used to properly control game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 into the general prize opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that leads to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration body 61 in the gaming area 6. The first starting winning device 11D has a first starting opening 11 formed into which a game ball can enter. The first starting winning device 11D has a non-operating structure. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Note that a warp portion 61w is formed from the left side to the lower end of the center decoration body 61 to allow the game ball to pass therethrough. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp section 61w passes through the inside of the warp section 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp section 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end of the center decorative body 61. A downward guide portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below this downward guide portion 61y.

Directly below the first starting port 11 in the gaming area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric tube opening/closing member 12k included in the electric tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the gaming area 6. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the second starting port 12 is opened to allow entry of a ball. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball, and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. Note that the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

On the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the gaming area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13, a big winning device 14D is provided. The grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a grand prize opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an AT opening/closing member 14k included in the big winning device 14D. That is, the big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big prize opening 14. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that its upper end is tilted forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k comes into a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the big prize opening 14 is opened to allow entry of a ball.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the grand prize opening 14, a predetermined number (nine in the basic embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the big prize opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the big winning device 14D in the gaming area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and a guiding path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the gaming area 6 (the front surface of the gaming board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the front. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the general winning port 10, and the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 13 are collectively described as the first starting port 11, They are collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as "left-handed hitting". On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as "right-handed hitting".

In the gaming area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with left-hand hitting is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with right-hand hitting. This flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the big prize opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the ball to the right.

In addition, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained. The board effect unit EU is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board presentation unit EU.

The image display device 50 is configured with a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section 50a capable of displaying 3D images. The image display device 50 is placed several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The platen movable body 55k includes a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is placed in the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downwardly moved from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that in the standby state, only a part of the lower end of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and the majority is invisible to the player (see FIG. 3(A)).

Then, the movable plate 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the platen movable body 55k is located approximately at the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and may be a position where the movable plate 55k is located above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). Note that the rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be performed when the movable platen body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, while being held at the operating position, and when moving from the operating position to the standby position.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a description will be given of the display devices 8 disposed to the right of approximately the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (the part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special pattern 1 display 81a that variably displays a first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 1"), a second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 2") ''), and a regular symbol display 82 that variably displays a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol"). In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 holding display 83a that displays the number of special drawings 1 held, which will be described later, and a special drawing 2 holding display 83b, which displays the number of special drawings 2 holding, which will be described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is carried out triggered by the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 12. The special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing will be described later. In addition, in the following explanation, special map 1 and special map 2 will be collectively referred to as "special map", and special map 1 lottery and special map 2 lottery will be collectively referred to as "special map lottery". In addition, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the "special figure display 81." Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the "special figure reservation display 83."

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a jackpot game with opening of the jackpot 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: off), 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the LED on the far right lights up as "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The manner in which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs blinking at once unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, this is the case when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during execution of variable display of special figures or during execution of a jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning prize. This reserved special drawing drawing and the variable display of the special drawing are called "special drawing reservation."

The special drawing reservation includes the special drawing 1 drawing that was held based on the prize won in the first starting opening 11, and "special drawing 1 pending" which represents the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning winning in the second starting opening 12. There is a special drawing 2 lottery held based on , and a "special drawing 2 pending" representing a variable display of special drawing 2. Then, the special figure 1 pending display 83a displays the number of special figure 1 pending, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 drawings and variable displays of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 pending display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 drawings and the number of variable displays of special figure 2.

It is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, or not to set them. In addition, when setting upper limits to the number of special symbols 1 and 2 reserved, the number of special symbols 1 and 2 can be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 and the number of special drawings 2 being held is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and the special figure is displayed by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold. Displays the number of Figure 1 reservations and Special Figure 2 reservations. In addition, in the following, the number of special drawings 1 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 1 reserved (U1)", and the number of special symbols 2 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2)". In addition, the "number of reserved special drawings 1" and "number of reserved special drawings 2" are collectively referred to as the "number of reserved special drawings." Furthermore, the "special figure 1 holding display 83a" and the "special drawing 2 holding display 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special drawing holding display 83."

Further, the variable display of the common symbol is executed when a common symbol lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball at the gate 13. The variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stationary displayed ordinary map (stopped ordinary map) is identification information representing the result of the ordinary map lottery drawn as a display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure, an auxiliary game accompanied by opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The general figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general map display device 82 represents the general map corresponding to the result of the general map lottery, that is, the result of the general map lottery. If the result of the general lottery is a win, both LEDs will eventually light up as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a win. Furthermore, if the result of the general drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED will finally light up, such as "■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. In the basic embodiment, the mode of fluctuating display of the common map is such that both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of the fluctuating display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs flashing at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained based on FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY, there is a game control board 100 that performs control (progress of the game) related to games that can obtain gaming profits, and a Power is supplied to the production control board 120 that controls the production, the image control board 140 that controls images, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, and each of the boards 100, 120, 140, and 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on/off.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 is mounted on the game control board 100, which controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. In addition, games in which gaming profits can be obtained that are controlled by the game control board 100 include special drawing lottery, variable display of special drawings, jackpot games, game state setting described later, general drawing lottery, and variable display of normal drawings. , auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary hit determination table, which will be described later. Game control tables, etc. are stored. Note that the gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage section 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage section 105 will be explained. As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, special drawings can be reserved, but if special drawings can be reserved, that is, if the number of special symbols reserved is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery etc. is obtained based on this winning prize. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the first starting port 11 is referred to as "special map 1 related judgment information", and the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12. The determination information that is determined is referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information." In addition, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information."

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Moreover, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

In addition, the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to display devices 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a firing device 72 is also connected thereto. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY and allows balls to be rented based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls that are paid out are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting them.

Further, the firing device 72 is a device that fires game balls. The handle 72k constitutes an operation section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball, and is included in the shooting device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect a contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the release control circuit 175.

Furthermore, a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing motor 72m so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the performance control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the production control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the production control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The production control board 120 can be positioned as a production control unit that controls production, together with an image control board 140, an audio control circuit 161, and a sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the performance control section includes at least a performance control board 120, and performs game performance, customer waiting performance, and operation promotion using performance devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.). It is sufficient if it is possible to control the presentation.

The performances that are controlled by the performance control board 120 include game performances (special figure fluctuation performances, hold performances, jackpot game performances, etc.), customer waiting performances, and operations of the first performance button 40k and the second performance button 41k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operation during the valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123 that stores programs. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

The production ROM 123 stores programs for performing production control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The performance RAM 124 includes a starting winning command suspension storage section 125 that stores starting winning commands that will be described later, a symbol designation command storage section 126 that stores symbol designation commands that will be described later, and a special symbol that stores special symbol fluctuation start commands that will be described later. A fluctuation start command storage section 127 is provided.

Further, an image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Have them do it. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video Memory) that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145. Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or a portion of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, designs, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. (including designs) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured with a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the production control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a first performance button sensor 40a and a second performance button sensor 41a. The first performance button sensor 40a detects that the first performance button 40k is pressed. The second performance button sensor 41a detects that the second performance button 41k is pressed. When the first performance button sensor 40a and the second performance button sensor 41a detect that each has been operated, they output a signal to the performance control board 120 according to the detected content.

Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the production control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the production control board 120 include a motor 55m1 for rotating the board movable body, and a motor 55m2 for lifting and lowering the board movable body. The plate movable body rotation motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The board movable body lifting motor 55m2 can raise or lower the lifting member 55k2. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, below, the operation|movement of "the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively called "the operation|movement of the board movable body 55k." Furthermore, rotating the rotary member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the movable platen body 55k."

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that the sub-drive board 162 may be configured with a board and the CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and control the operation of the panel movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Main Games Played by the Gaming Machine Next, the main games played by the Pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a regular lottery when the fired game balls pass through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the general drawings are displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of general drawings and auxiliary games based on the general drawing start condition being satisfied, obtaining general drawing related determination information, and performing general drawing lottery. I can do it. The acquired ordinary symbol related determination information includes ordinary symbol random numbers, as shown in FIG. 8(A). The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time saving state (time saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number determination values) are appropriately distributed to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination/Ordinary Figure Variable Display Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Judgment is a determination for determining the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern by using the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination Table as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state), the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state. There is a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) that is used in the state.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, when a losing regular symbol (losing regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the regular symbol is determined to be a regular symbol fluctuation pattern in which the regular symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is displayed. Regarding the variable display of common figures in the case of stop display, a common figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern in which the common symbol fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display, a general pattern fluctuation pattern in which the general pattern fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined. It should be noted that these general figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is opened.

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Pachinko game machine PY controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Note that the specific contents of each element, such as the number of openings and the opening time, can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time such as 0.2 seconds during which it is difficult for the electric chew 12D to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, if the game ball is opened twice for 2.5 seconds with a 1.0 second interval (closed) in between, the first opening time is longer than the first opening time, and the game ball enters the electric chew 12D. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time which is easy to open.

Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time for each auxiliary game is the total time for that auxiliary game, and for example, it may be opened multiple times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again after a closing interval. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting hole 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbols 1 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played, and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, in the following, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as a variable display of special symbols and a jackpot game based on the establishment of a starting condition, the acquisition of special symbol related determination information, and the performance of a special symbol lottery. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made regarding the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8(B), the acquired special symbol related determination information includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination made using the special figure related determination information will be explained.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment The jackpot judgment is to use a jackpot judgment table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with a gaming state to be described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") described later, and a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot determination table for normal probability") used in the high probability state described later. , "high probability jackpot determination table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number determination values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It should be noted that the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10(B), for example, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot (content advantageous to the player) consisting of gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table shows the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special symbol 1/special symbol 2), in other words, the winning pattern that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The types of the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 and the jackpot symbol of special symbol 2 can be set as appropriate, but for example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 As such, three types of jackpot symbols are provided: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, and three types of jackpot symbols are provided as the jackpot symbol of special pattern 2, jackpot symbol D, jackpot symbol E, and jackpot symbol F. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. Note that the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment For reach judgment, for example, when the result of jackpot judgment is a loss, use a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with a gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time saving state (time saving reach determination table). judgment table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into the reach determination results "with reach (reach occurs)" and "without reach (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY compares the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table and determines whether there is a reach or there is no reach (whether or not a reach occurs).

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, the result of reach determination, which is performed on the premise that the result of jackpot determination is "lose", is referred to as "reach with reach" (reach occurs), and "no reach" is referred to as "reach with reach (reach occurs)". This is sometimes referred to as ``no reach failure.'' Also, a "loss without reach" is sometimes referred to as a "do-no-lose", and a "lose with a reach" is sometimes referred to as a "lose-to-reach".

3-2-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination is performed using special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (special symbol fluctuation patterns) as shown in FIGS. The purpose is to determine a variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of variable display of special figures using a determination table (determination table).

The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time, the so-called "shaku", the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later, etc. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can also include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the performance flow (performance content) of the special symbol fluctuation performance. In addition, the type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is based on the type of special symbol (special pattern 1/special pattern 2) that performs variable display that is the target of determination, in other words, the starting opening where the prize was won due to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to relate to the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing this.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpots, one for lose with reach, and one for lose without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach and loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures 1. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach-less loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 pending number. Specifically, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses that is used for.

Then, the special figure display device 81 displays a variation of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, after the variable display of the special pattern, if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special pattern variable display (result of the special pattern lottery), the next variable display of the special pattern will not be performed immediately, and the variable display will continue. , a jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with the production flow of the special figure variation production as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, typical effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be explained.

The performances that make up the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle performance.

Normal fluctuation indicates that the performance symbols that had been stopped and displayed have started to fluctuate, and each of the performance symbols that make up each production symbol has been fluctuated and displayed at such high speed that it is difficult to recognize, suggesting that the variable display of the special symbol has started. It is a performance that In addition, the special symbol fluctuation performance (the part from the start of the variation of the production pattern to the stop of variation) related to the no-reach loss variation, and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special symbol variation production where the reach occurs, usually fluctuates. It may consist of

In N reach, immediately after a reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuations, for example, the production symbols that make up the reach are temporarily stopped at the same position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and the remaining one is This is a performance in which the performance symbols slow down and fluctuate at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol fluctuation performance ends at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol that fluctuates at that low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one performance pattern stops at a performance pattern different from the performance pattern that constitutes the reach. If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol changes again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while maintaining reach.

L reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, L reach is a performance that can be executed after N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than N reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than N reach. Even in L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is With the right effect pattern EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a (at the upper left of the display section 50a), the background image is switched to the L reach exclusive background image (the L reach exclusive video is played). Note that in L reach, 2DCG animation images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As for the content of L Reach, a video of a scene different from a match related to SP Reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character undergoing special training to learn a special move.

SP reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, SP reach is a performance that can be executed after, for example, N reach, and is performed for a longer time than L reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than L reach. Even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display section 50a, with the right effect symbol EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-specific background image (the SP reach-specific video is played). Note that in SP reach, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the content of SP Reach, a video of a match between a team to which the main character belongs and a team to which a rival of the main character belongs is displayed.

The battle performance is, for example, a performance that can be executed after reach in a time-saving state, and is a performance that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in battle production, the achieved reach is maintained, but the production symbols that make up the reach are reduced and moved to predetermined positions (for example, the left production symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right production symbol EZ3 is placed at the upper left of the display section 50a. (upper right corner), the background image will switch to the battle production-specific background image (the battle production-specific video will play). Furthermore, in the battle performance, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance, the performance symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance are displayed on the display section 50a. This includes not only a state where it is visible from the display section 50a, but also a state where the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or impossible to see from the display section 50a for a predetermined period of time in relation to a dedicated background image. Further, the contents of the normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the effects that make up the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. 11 and 12, it is possible to give a name to the special pattern variation pattern by associating it with the jackpot determination result and the content of the special pattern variation production. . The special pattern variation pattern related to a jackpot is sometimes collectively referred to as a "jackpot variation", and the special pattern variation pattern related to a loss is sometimes collectively referred to as a "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special pattern variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special pattern variation pattern in which N reach is performed is special pattern variation. The special pattern variation pattern where the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, loss fluctuations with reach are sometimes referred to as "loss fluctuations with reach", and loss fluctuations without reach are sometimes collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuations".

3-2-5. Pre-reading Judgment Before making a jackpot judgment, the pachinko gaming machine PY can make a pre-reading judgment based on the acquired special figure related judgment information using a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, for example. be. The look-ahead determination table is based on the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special figure that is variably displayed depending on the starting winning (special drawing 1/special drawing). 2). That is, the pre-reading determination table includes a first pre-reading determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where a prize is won in the first starting opening 11 and a variable display of special drawing 1 is performed, and a first reading determining table (FIG. 13) when a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 and a special drawing is displayed. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in which variable display of No. 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "first prefetch determination," and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "second prefetch determination."

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with gaming states (normal gaming state/high probability high base gaming state/low probability high base gaming state) which will be described later. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state (a lookahead decision table for normal gaming state), and a lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state). There is a look-ahead determination table for the state) and a look-ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state (a look ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state).

In other words, the lookahead determination table includes a first lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state, a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state. A first lookahead determination table used, a second lookahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a second lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a second lookahead determination table used in the low probability high base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used for.

In addition, by the pre-reading determination using the pre-reading determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol performed by winning the starting openings 11 and 12 is specified. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the pre-reading determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a pre-read determination result.

The pre-reading determination result including information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the production control board 120 as a pre-read determination result along with its generation. Note that the type of information to be specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate. For example, information regarding the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the pre-reading determination result.

As described above, a variable display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special symbol variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next special symbol is not variably displayed and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be explained.

3-3. Jackpot Game A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round game, and a final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

Note that it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Furthermore, hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is also referred to as "one round (1R)," and the tenth round game is also referred to as "10 rounds (10R)."

The pachinko game machine PY then controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate a jackpot game with a type of jackpot symbol. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the jackpot opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the jackpot opening for each opening, and the time to be closed until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

The pachinko game machine PY can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be explained.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 has elapsed, the big winning hole is activated. The winning hole 14 is closed and the round game ends. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game will be executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game may be executed by a method different from this. You may also do so. For example, if a device is provided in the gaming area 6 that can allocate the prizes to two winning holes, if a winning hole is won in one of the winning holes, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games will be executed, but if a prize is won in the other winning hole, a predetermined winning hole will be executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of a larger number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of a smaller number of round games than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot gaming states include a normal gaming state, which is a basic gaming state, and a specific gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

What is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Furthermore, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 that is advantageous to the player means that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. This means that it will take longer.

The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and a second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. Three types can be set: a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that instead of all of these three types of specific gaming states being installed in the pachinko gaming machine PY, some of the three types of specific gaming states can also be installed.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state and which is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a "normal probability state."

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state. A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time saving state." On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is defined as "non-time saving". "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be explained in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier to win a prize in the second starting slot 12 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state will be described.

For example, by making the time saving state a state in which the normal pattern variation time is likely to be shorter than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as mentioned above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) is shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Let it be determined. As a result, in the time saving state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, then the number of regular lottery drawings per unit time is the same. As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In addition, by making the time saving state a state where the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 5.0 seconds in one auxiliary game. Make it open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal pattern fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time will be the same, so once The longer the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game, the longer the electric chew 12D is opened per unit time.

Furthermore, by making the time-saving state a state in which it is easier to determine a win in the winning determination compared to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 6600/65536, while in the time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 59936/65536. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal figure variation time in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability of a hit being determined is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In this way, in the time saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer. By satisfying the three conditions, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in the time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot win without greatly reducing the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal gaming state. In other words, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

Note that in the time saving state, all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may not all be met, but only some of the conditions may be met. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and winning into the second starting port 12 may be facilitated.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special pattern variable display per unit time is small, or special The average figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) in the starting opening are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In addition, in the following, the first specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability high base gaming state" and the second specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability low "Base gaming state" and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as "low probability high base gaming state." Furthermore, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state."

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base gaming state is controlled as a normal probability state and a time saving state, the high probability low base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a non time saving state, and the high probability high base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a time saving state. It can be said that it is a gaming state in which

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low probability low base gaming state, a low probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, a high probability high base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state can also be said to be a gaming state advantageous to the player because the jackpot opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be called "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, the high probability high base gaming state and the high probability low base gaming state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting slot 12 is higher than in the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability, low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the number of prize balls for one winning is greater than the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is first set. Further, the jackpot game state is set by the stop display of jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific gaming state is set by winning a jackpot and executing a jackpot game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be explained.

3-5. Setting a gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game Pachinko gaming machine PY can set a new gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game. That is, after a jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in a new game state. The duration of this gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, as a new gaming state, a specific gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, it is also possible to limit the period during which a specific gaming state can continue.

When limiting the duration of a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be ended when the termination condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high probability high base gaming state, when the termination condition is satisfied, a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability low base gaming state may be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may continue until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state, and when the end condition is met, the normal gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, the termination conditions for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the termination condition, for example, the number of execution times of special figure variable display can be set. In addition, it is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but also the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls fired after the jackpot game, the number of times the game ball passes through the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the termination condition to be the result of terminating the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Furthermore, these elements may be set as end conditions singly or in combination.

In addition, these ending conditions may be set the same for all specific gaming states that can be set after a jackpot game, or may be set for some specific gaming states among the specific gaming states that can be set. You may do so. Furthermore, the termination conditions may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the game state controlled after a jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled based on the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Furthermore, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E ends, the game may be controlled in a low probability high base gaming state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low probability high base game state, and the end condition can be set to 100 times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, the relationship between this jackpot type symbol, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, focusing on the gaming profit of a jackpot, a jackpot in which the game progresses with a high probability after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "high probability jackpot." Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and in a time saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot."

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 16 to 32.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, the special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, when the first performance button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a, and frequency settings for the effects to be performed. Note that setting items related to presentation can be set as appropriate. Further, it is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed from the customer waiting demonstration video G100 by the player's operation.

The normal production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability low base gaming state" and indicates the normal gaming state. Further, a plurality of lower performance modes belonging to the normal performance mode can be provided. For example, a first normal presentation mode, a second normal presentation mode, a third normal presentation mode, etc. can be provided as presentation modes at a lower level belonging to the normal presentation mode.

In addition, below, the production mode of the lower hierarchy which belongs to production mode is also called "production stage." Accordingly, the first normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "first normal presentation stage," the second normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "second normal presentation stage," and the third normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "third normal presentation stage." say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically the production mode that is set when the special figure variation display starts for the first time after the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on is the first normal production stage ( (first normal performance mode). However, the type of production mode that is initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

In this way, when a plurality of performance stages belonging to the normal performance mode are provided, the performance stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set to a predetermined number of special symbol variable effects being performed without winning the jackpot. Further, as a switching condition, it can be set that a specific effect, such as a special symbol variation effect based on SP reach/loss variation, is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in special figure fluctuation effects, but the special figure variation effect is the entire section of the special figure variation effect when a reach does not occur, and a reach is established when a reach occurs. It can be divided into the first stage before the reach occurs, and the second stage after the reach is established in the case where a reach occurs. Note that the first part consists of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

In the first stage of the first normal presentation stage, a background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing a city view is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the second normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the field of a baseball field (FIG. 17(B): second normal background image G112) is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the third normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the inside of the restaurant (FIG. 17(C): third normal background image G113) is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first to third normal performance stages, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed. A special background image will be displayed depending on the type of reach.

Note that the dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a common background image in the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

Further, the normal performance mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal performance mode may be a performance mode indicating a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal performance mode may be provided. Further, a predetermined performance mode different from the normal performance mode may be set in a low probability low base game state and a high probability low base game state that occur under certain conditions.

The variable probability production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "high probability high base gaming state" and indicates the high probability high base gaming state. In the first stage of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the variable probability performance mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability performance mode is displayed.

The time-saving production mode can be set in the "low-probability, high-base gaming state" or "high-probability, high-base gaming state," and is either the low-probability, high-base gaming state or the high-probability, high-base gaming state; This is a production mode that indicates the state. In the first stage of the time-saving production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(E), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and time-saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the time-saving production mode, a dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach in the time-saving production mode.

In addition, the time-saving performance mode can be set only in the low probability high base gaming state, and can also be set as a performance mode indicating the low probability high base gaming state.

In addition, for either or both of the fixed variable production mode and the time-saving production mode, in the same way as the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is met, the production stage is switched. You can also do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(A), an opening image G1 that suggests the start of a jackpot game or a right-hand hit image G2 that encourages "right-hand hitting" is displayed on the display section 50a. A jackpot opening performance will be held where the will be displayed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

In addition, in the jackpot production mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(B), the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display section 50a, and the round image indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the display section 50a. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid out prize balls are displayed. In addition, during a round game, as a round effect, a background image (round background) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a as a background of the right-handed hit image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4. Image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display section 50a displays an ending image G5 that suggests the production mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that have been paid out. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball count image G6. be done.

In addition, hereinafter, the jackpot opening performance, the round performance, and the jackpot ending performance are collectively referred to as the "jackpot game performance" as the performance executed in the jackpot game. That is, a jackpot game performance is performed in the jackpot performance mode.

4-2. Special figure variation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result).

In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the fluctuating display of performance symbols, the performance symbols change and then stop. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the performance symbols.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation performance performed on the display section 50a, it is also possible to use images other than the variation display of production symbols. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display section 50a, a special feature using various presentation devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board moving device 55, a first presentation button device 40, and a second presentation button device 41 is used. It is possible to perform figure fluctuation effects.

Next, the effect patterns displayed on the display section 50a in the special figure variable effect executed in response to the special figure variable display will be explained. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and multiple types are provided. Specifically, one of the constituent elements of the effect pattern constitutes identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the effect patterns can be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect patterns can be provided. Then, a performance pattern including the number "1" is defined as a performance pattern G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For convenience, when the individual performance symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "performance symbol G10."

In addition, the numerical parts of the production patterns G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical parts of the production patterns G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the constituent elements of the effect pattern G10. Note that the configuration of the performance symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect pattern display area for displaying the effect pattern G10 will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the display section 50a is divided into three parts approximately equally in the horizontal direction, and the left, center, and right sides are divided into a left presentation pattern area 50b1, a middle presentation pattern area 50b2, and a right presentation pattern. This can be the area 50b3. The performance pattern G10 is displayed in any of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first part of the special symbol variation performance, the performance pattern G10 displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1", and the performance pattern G10 displayed in the middle performance pattern area 50b2 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1". They are collectively referred to as "middle performance symbols EZ2," and the performance symbols G10 displayed in the right performance symbol area 50b3 are collectively referred to as "right performance symbols EZ3." That is, in the left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, and right performance pattern area 50b3, the performance pattern G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the performance pattern G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is written as a left performance pattern EZ1, a middle performance pattern EZ2, and a right performance pattern EZ3.

In addition, as described later, in the special pattern variation performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, but ultimately the special symbol lottery results (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type, reach determination result) are shown. The stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in this manner. When announcing a jackpot as a result of the special drawing lottery, performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three performance symbols G10 of the same number are lined up side by side (so-called "Zero"). Therefore, hereinafter, the effect pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when notifying a jackpot will be referred to as a "jackpot effect pattern." For example, if the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed as "7, 7, 7," the jackpot design will be "performance symbol G10g," and if they are statically displayed as "9, 9, 9," the jackpot design will be " The production pattern is G10i. Furthermore, the jackpot effect symbols may be abbreviated by numbers included in the effect symbols. For example, if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10g", the jackpot effect pattern will be "7", and if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10i", the jackpot effect pattern will be "9". Furthermore, as will be described later, in the special symbol variation performance, the special symbol lottery result is completely displayed when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special symbol variation performance, before the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped and displayed may be changed. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), they are changed to a mode indicating another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). may be done. Therefore, when the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that first indicates a jackpot (before they are changed), the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers that constitute the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. It is also referred to as a ``jackpot effect pattern''.

In addition, in the special pattern variation production, the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are the production symbol G10 with the same number. Reach may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop display). As will be described later, reach is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state, and by reaching reach, the chance of winning a jackpot has increased. Therefore, the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 related to the reach is referred to as a "reach performance pattern". For example, when the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “1”, the reach production symbol becomes “production symbol G10a”, and when they temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “3” , the reach effect pattern becomes “effect pattern G10c”. Furthermore, the reach effect design may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect pattern. For example, if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c", the ready-to-reach performance symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in which small patterns are variably displayed in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display section 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, small symbols can be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. Although the design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, for example, the number part of the performance symbol G10 may be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed lines, but these are the left presentation pattern area 50b1, These are described to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, right effect symbol area 50b3, and small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, the performances that constitute the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance. Some of these will now be explained.

4-2-1. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of first performing normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal fluctuations will be specifically explained. As small symbols, a left small symbol KZ1, a medium small symbol KZ2, and a right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), on the display section 50a, the left effect pattern EZ1, the medium effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small pattern KZ1, the medium small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern When the variable display of the special pattern starts from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is started, the variable display of the special pattern starts as shown in FIG. 20(B) As shown in the figure, the special figure variation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 can be made different. For example, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling each production symbol EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling each of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a. It is also possible to change the positions one after another at a fixed position. Note that the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be the same.

In addition, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side thereof, such as background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of this special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with no reach and no loss (for example, normal loss variation), the variable display of the special pattern ends (special pattern (stop display), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss eyes (so-called "rose eyes") that are unique to no-reach losses.

Towards the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 20(D), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stops (temporary stop) at the center position.

Finally, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in a horizontally lined state at approximately the vertical center position, are completely stopped all at once as shown in FIG. 20(F). , and the stop is confirmed (the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), come to a complete stop, that is, when the final stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to EZ3 KZ3 stops all at once at the same random number as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

Note that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stop means that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move greatly as in a scroll display, but slightly shake or make small reciprocating motions on the spot. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, but this provisional stop display and A definitive stop display is sometimes referred to as a "stop display" in a broad sense. In addition, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the performance symbols are stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3 → middle performance symbol EZ2, but the order of stopping ( The method) is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, we will explain how reach is established. Even if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), basically the same as the case without reach described above, on the display section 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the variable display of the special symbols starts from a state where the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, As shown in FIG. 21(B), the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and at the same time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. As shown in 21(D), the right effect symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and a reach is established. When a reach is achieved, an image G11 indicating that a reach is achieved (a reach suggesting image) is displayed. Incidentally, even if the reach is achieved with the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 continues to be performed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in the order of left production symbol EZ1 → right production symbol EZ3, but the order (method) of temporary stopping is as follows. It is not limited to , and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the numbers of the production symbols that constitute the reach are not limited to "5" either. Further, the position where the vehicle is temporarily stopped (temporary stop) is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols forming the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be in other directions such as a diagonal direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special symbol variation performance when there is no reach and a loss, and the section from the start of the special symbol variation performance when the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be made into normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform various preview performances such as a so-called "pseudo series", a cut-in preview, and a dialogue preview until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is also possible to enter the so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established after a normal fluctuation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win. Next, N reach will be specifically explained.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point on. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22(A), the state when reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the medium effect pattern EZ2, which is fluctuatingly displayed (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually slows down.

If the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), from the state where reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 will temporarily be at approximately the center position in the vertical direction. The game stops (temporarily stops), and a stop display of the production pattern indicating a loss is performed. At this time, reach has been established, so as shown in Figure 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol consisting of a number ("4" in Figure 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers that constitute the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, as shown in FIG. The left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporary stop) completely stop at a loss that is unique to a loss with a reach, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, 3 The three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 stop all at once at the same loss points as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are unique to a reach loss, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special symbol variation performance does not end at N reach, as shown in Figure 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium performance symbol EZ2 that has not stopped will fluctuate at high speed again, and N while the reach is maintained. It may develop (switch) from reach to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY can perform L Reach after N Reach. The L reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in the case of L reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Moreover, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), a background image exclusively for L reach (background image for L reach G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the L reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the content is such that the main character confesses his feelings to a girl.

When the L reach background image G114 is displayed, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a meeting place, as shown in FIG. 23(A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23(B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, a production symbol with the number "5" that constitutes the reach and a production symbol with the number "4" that does not constitute the reach appear as the medium production symbol EZ2. It rotates slowly, coming out from the back side to the front side, and then returning to the back side.

While the rotation of the number "4" production symbol and the number "5" production symbol continues, Thule related to the L reach background image G114 progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), a scene appears in which the main character confesses his feelings to the girl. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, the effect pattern with the number "5" that makes up the reach and the effect pattern with the number "4" that does not make up the reach seem to mutually repel the opponent. collide with each other. The number "5" production symbol constitutes a reach, and the number "4" production symbol does not constitute a reach, so the number "4" production symbol is blown away and the number "5" production symbol is If it remains, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established in a manner that indicates a jackpot, while if the production symbol with the number "5" is blown away and the production symbol with the number "4" remains, the production is in a manner that indicates a loss in reach. The stop display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene in FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L reach, and a performance suggesting a jackpot (jackpot suggestion performance) is executed or a performance suggesting a loss (loss suggestion performance) is executed. This constitutes a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point").

At the winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), a smiling girl will appear close-up on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1). After this is displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), the main character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. displayed in the following manner. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character happy after successfully confessing and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion production. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the figure is displayed in the L reach background image G114. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), a close-up of a girl with a sad expression is displayed on the display section 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she is disappointed because she failed to confess. The main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. is displayed. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the reach is out of reach.

The display of the main character being disappointed after failing to confess constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing position for reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach Also, the pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the L reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Furthermore, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a background image exclusively for SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the SP reach background image G115 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the story consists of a confrontation between the main character and an enemy character who is a rival of the main character. ing. Note that the main character is a baseball pitcher, the enemy character is a baseball batter, and the two face off in the positions of a pitcher and a batter in a baseball game.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25(A), and then an enemy character appears in the center of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 25(B). An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws a ball, and as shown in FIG. 26(B), the ball advances toward the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and a scene is reached in which the confrontation between the protagonist character and the enemy character is about to come to an end. This scene constitutes a turning point (win-lose turning point) in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, where the main character wins, suggesting a jackpot, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the battle, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character shouting after winning the battle and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion performance. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the match, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss.

The display of the main character being disappointed after losing the battle constitutes a presentation suggesting a loss. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing eye for reach.

Next, the movable object performance and operation performance performed in the special figure variation performance will be explained. The movable body performance and operation performance may be performed as part of the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, or jackpot game performance, etc., or may be performed independently of these performances. Sometimes it is done. First, I will explain the moving object performance.

4-3. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body performance that involves the movement of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure variation performance or a jackpot game performance. The movable object performance is a performance using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable object effect functions as an effect that suggests the development to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first As shown in (B), the plate movable device 55 is activated, and the plate movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position when viewed from the front, and is held at that position for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board moving device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. Note that the operation details of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Performance Next, the operation performance will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY performs an operation promotion performance at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure fluctuation performance or a jackpot game performance, and an operation result performance according to the operation of the first performance button 40k, the second performance button 41k, etc. It is possible to perform operations including. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance, and each is a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance.

For example, as mentioned above, when a winning or losing point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period (operation valid period) occurs during which the pressing operation of the first production button 40k is valid, and along with the occurrence of this operation valid period, , as shown in FIG. 29(A), a performance (operation promotion performance) that prompts the user to operate the first performance button 40k is performed.

In the operation promotion performance, a first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first performance button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing An image (operation image) G12b representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c.

Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that FIG. 29(B) shows a state in which the operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the operation valid time has elapsed.

Then, when the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, After the remaining time of the valid operation period runs out without 40k being operated, the operation result presentation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 29(C), for example, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the operation result is that the panel movable device 55 is operated, the panel movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is lowered. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable object presentation. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 accompanying the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the movable board 55k is raised, thereby ending the operation result production. When the operation result presentation is completed, a jackpot suggestion presentation is performed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or the first production button 40k is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the performance button operation validity period runs out without being executed, the operation result performance is not performed and the loss suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board moving device 55 or the display of the effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special symbol variation performance, but can also be executed in the jackpot performance.

4-5. Pre-reading effect Next, a pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display subject to special figure reservation is executed will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold for which no jackpot judgment has been made, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, at any timing of the special figure fluctuation effect. . The pre-read performance is a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation, and functions as a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reservation. As an example of a look-ahead performance, there is a reservation change notice using a reservation performance that represents special map reservation. Here, the pending performance and pending change notice performed in the normal performance mode will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 30(A), the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a section in the substantially center of the lower end of the display section 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially equally in the left and right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the first variable display of special figure 1 is displayed based on the special figure 1 related random number that occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 reserves and corresponds to the special figure 1 reserve. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth reserved special figure 1 reservations are generated based on the special figure 1 related random numbers corresponding to the special figure 1 reservations. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold, in which special figure 1 variable display is performed, is displayed second to fourth.

In addition, below, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in 1st area|region 50d1 is called "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icons displayed in the second area 50d2, third area 50d3, and fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2" and "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 3." "Special figure 1 reservation" and "Special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, the existing special drawing 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order in which they occur.

Moreover, the display area 50e is formed to the left of the hold display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the "hold effect" corresponding to special drawing 1 hold is Although not included, since the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related, hereinafter, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon will be collectively referred to as "hold effect". Further, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon." Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation display being executed that the icon indicates is also referred to as "the variation".

In addition, in FIG. 30(A), the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e are clearly indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly shown by broken lines; This is written to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be explained. In the following explanation, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (the special figure variable effect is in progress) and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the aforementioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold (order of hold) A reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2) is displayed, and in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown), a reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2 A hold icon HA3 representing special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the aforementioned display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30(B) is the normal mode.

In this manner, in the hold performance, special drawings 1 are displayed in order of occurrence from the left end to the right of the hold display area 50d. That is, the variable display of reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed with a reservation icon. Ru.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Continuously, when variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown). to the first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are each shifted one by one to the left. This means that the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold that the hold icon HA3 represents is the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation in response to the special figure variable display being started next.

Further, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, so it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. That is, the word "icon" is prefixed to "pending" for the icon displayed in the pending display area 50d, and "relevant" for the icon displayed in the display area 50e. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition for the special symbol fluctuation display is satisfied for the special symbol reservation indicated by the hold icon, the special symbol fluctuation display related to the establishment of the start condition is A corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when changing from a hold icon to the relevant icon, in other words, when moving the icon from the hold display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the reserved display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special drawing 1 reservation occurs, a new reservation is made according to the occurrence of the special symbol 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 30(E). Icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting slot 11 and a special drawing 1 related random number is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon will disappear when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, it will remain in the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (on hold and in progress). Depending on the icon, the icon exists under different names (pending icon and the icon).

By the way, as mentioned above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko game machine PY can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on this validity information and special symbol variation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called a "hold notice."

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when a pending notice is given, the player can expect that he may win a jackpot with the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of the suspension notice will be explained. As a specific example of the suspension notice, assume that the display mode of the suspension icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) becomes a special mode.

One type of reservation notice is a reservation notice that enters a special mode immediately after the reservation icon is displayed, in other words, a reservation notice is given when special drawing 1 reservation occurs (at the time of winning at the first starting gate 11). There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). In addition, in the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, even if you try to make it completely stationary, the display position does not move, but the It may also be configured so that it sways slightly in the field.

Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (the hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment after being displayed, but it may be displayed in a special mode and the period during which it is displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of reservation notice, there is a reservation notice type in which the reservation icon takes a special mode when it moves, in other words, a reservation icon change notice is given when the special figure 1 reservation is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) moves to the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation effect) is started based on the special symbol 1 reservation represented by the reservation icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 that was displayed moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 that was displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, its display mode changes from a normal mode to a special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (a notice of hold is given) .

Furthermore, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the reservation notice, so that the degree of jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. The jackpot expectation level indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white < green < red < gold.

In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the pre-read effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, but includes images other than the hold icon HA on the display section 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission from the frame lamp 53, and board movement. It is possible to perform the operation using a presentation device other than the image display device 50, such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as a production mode of the look-ahead production, in addition to a production mode that continues without interruption from the execution until the special symbol change display starts, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, there is also a stoppage of the production pattern. It is also possible to use a performance mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time a display is performed or a variable display of performance symbols is started.

5. Game control by game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 33 to 42. Note that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

Further, counters, timers, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko game machine PY is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) is performed. The power-on processing includes permission settings for access to the gaming RAM 104, settings for the gaming CPU 102, SIO (System Input/Output), PIO (Parallel Input/Output), and CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit: interrupt time management). settings etc. of the circuit for

Following the power-on processing, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the regular symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are updated by adding one. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) ends and until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) The process of updating counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. In addition, if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while interrupts are disabled, the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after interrupts are enabled (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the production control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and inputs the detection signal from the lower tray full switch to the game as the lower tray full data. The data is stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005)). After the end of S005), this is performed both during the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started.

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes (S107) and ends the game control side timer interrupt process (S005). Other processing (S107) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control process is performed to pay out prize balls to the player. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 are set to " A check is made to see if it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the gaming control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later) ), the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output processing (S101) of the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the data that was set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Outputs commands etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be explained using FIGS. 35 and 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the general winning hole 10, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO in S201), the process advances to step S203, and if a game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered into the game ball. General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("3" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the general winning hole 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process advances to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether the normal operation status (described later) is 1 or not, in other words, whether the normal figure variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process advances to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) is The normal symbol random number indicated by is acquired as the common symbol related determination information (S205), the acquired common symbol related determination information is stored in the common symbol retention storage section 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process advances to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. Second starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls (“2” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the second starting hole 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12.

Next, if the number of special drawings 2 pending (specifically the value of the counter (special drawing 2 holding number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special drawings 2 holding) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more, It is determined whether there is one (S209). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process advances to step S214, but if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "4" or more (less than "4"), ( NO in S209), the special figure 2 reservation number addition process is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, the special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start winning command is specified by comparing the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second starting winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 11, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. First starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S215). In the first starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("4" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the first starting hole 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 reservations (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not greater than (less than) "4" (NO in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. ), the special figure 1 reservation number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first lookahead determination process, the first start winning command is identified by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first lookahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserves in the special figure 1 reserve storage section 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. If a game ball has not entered the grand prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if a gaming ball has entered the grand prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the memory is stored in the gaming RAM 104. It is determined whether the counter value of the provided big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (S222). The big winning hole prize counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the big winning hole 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the basic embodiment, the prescribed number of prizes to win is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is ended, and the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not more than "11", that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning hole prize counter is incremented by 1 (S223), and the big winning hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player (S224). ), the sensor detection process ends. In addition, in the grand winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("9" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the grand winning hole 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the grand winning hole 14.

Note that sensors other than sensors 10a to 14a are provided as sensors capable of detecting game balls, and processes other than those shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed based on the sensor detecting a game ball. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, normal operation processing regarding control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing regarding the general figure display 82 and electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", a normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", a normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", a normal symbol confirmation process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. Note that the "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 86. Furthermore, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82 for the normal pattern fluctuation time according to the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern. , and change the normal operation status to "2". In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command in accordance with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the common symbol variation time has elapsed since the fluctuating display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether or not to end the fluctuating display of the common symbol), and If it is determined that the figure variation time has elapsed, the normal figure is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process (S1104) is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), it is determined whether a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether to end the stop display of the common symbol). If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped and displayed regular symbol is a losing symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the time of starting the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current gaming state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big prize winning device 14D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing regarding the special figure display 81, special figure reservation display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", gaming state setting processing (S1506) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process that is performed during standby when variable display of special symbols and jackpot games are not being performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation process will be detailed later.

The special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be detailed later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. When the jackpot game ends, the special operation status is changed to "5". Note that when each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and the state where the jackpot game is controlled is the "jackpot game state", and the setting of the special operation status "4" is called "jackpot". It is called "gaming state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high probability state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the termination condition for the high probability state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number of times counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when controlling in a time saving state after a jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the remaining time saving number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming status command indicating the gaming status after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the gaming status setting process.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 pending number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no memory of the special figure 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 12, It is determined whether the number of 1 reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no memory of the special drawing 1 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol waiting process.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "0" but the number of special drawings 1 holding is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special drawing 2 related determination information, but the first start If there is one or more stored pieces of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning in the mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special symbol 1 determination process (S1609), the first stored special symbol random number among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special symbol 1 pending storage unit 105a is read out, and the special symbol random number is read out based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state. Then, a judgment is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss (jackpot judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (jackpot symbol type determination). Then, jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in a special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and a symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "loss", loss symbol data representing a loss is set in the special pattern buffer, and a symbol designation command representing a loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (S1652) and proceed to step S1654; if it is not in a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), the time-saving After selecting the state special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1653), the process advances to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process advances to step S1655, and if it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), a jackpot symbol is selected from the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process advances to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, a reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is compared with a reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is a reach or no reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 next determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process advances to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special symbols 1 is checked, and the result is selected in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss according to the number of reserved special figures 1 (S1657), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special pattern variation pattern random number, and compares the special pattern variation pattern random number with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. Determine the special figure 1 variation pattern The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and starts the special figure 1 variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Note that the special operation timer is updated by 4ms in other processing in the game control side timer interrupt processing. In addition, the set special figure 1 variation start command includes information regarding the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and information about the special figure variation pattern judgment performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). Contains information about the results (information on special pattern fluctuation patterns, including information on whether there is a reach or not and special symbol fluctuation time).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special pattern 1 display 81a to start displaying the special pattern 1 in a variable manner based on the special pattern variation time corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a Special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the first reservation (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1612). In this way, the special drawing 1 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reservation number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns the customer waiting flag OFF (S1617), and performs special symbol waiting processing. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process ends without executing step S1617.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more pieces of special drawings 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12 are stored. If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 judgment process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process (S1603) are basically the same processing contents as the special figure 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). .

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the explanation will be omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1603), except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Since this process is similar to S1610), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b to Special figure 2 pending storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the fourth pending item (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1605). In this way, the special drawing 2 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special map 2 reservation number counter (S1606), and changes the special map 2 reservation number indicated by the special map 2 reservation display 83b by decreasing it by "1" (S1607). ), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process advances to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation is performed only when the special symbol 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation. In the basic embodiment, it is easier for the player to win a jackpot symbol with a large profit in the lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation than in the lottery based on the special symbol 1 reservation. In addition, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 hold and the extinguishment of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs, regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be explained using FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1701). If you do not want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (NO in S1701), you can end the special symbol fluctuating process, and if you want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (YES in S1701), you can display the fluctuating special symbols on the special symbol display 81. At the same time, special symbols are stopped and displayed according to the symbol data (jackpot symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 (S1702).

Next, a preset special symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special symbol variation stop command indicating the end of the variation display of the special symbol is output to the buffer. (S1704), changes the special operation status to "3" (S1705), and ends the special symbol variation process.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be explained using FIG. 42. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1751). If you do not want to end the special symbol stop display (NO in S1751), if you end the special symbol confirmation process and end the special symbol stop display (YES in S1751), you are currently in a normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1753), the process advances to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time-saving state (YES in S1753), it displays the remaining variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving state. The value of the remaining time saving number counter that measures the number of times (remaining number of time saving) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining time saving number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process advances to step S1757, and if the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0" (in S1755) YES), the time-saving state is shifted to a non-time-saving state (the time-saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), change the special operation status to "1" (S1762), finish the special symbol confirmation process, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), reset the gaming state ( A normal gaming state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number of times counter and time saving remaining number of times counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of effects by the effect control board 120 will be explained using the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 43 to 47. Note that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the control of effects by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the production control main process, first, a power-on process corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. Note that the random numbers for performance determination include various random numbers for determining performance content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special symbol variation performance pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for judgment regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation performance start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a (performs various effects using the image) according to the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various performances using audio), and controls the sub-drive board. 162 to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light (to perform various effects by emitting light), and to operate the board movable body 55k (to perform various effects by movement). The various performances include a special figure variation performance, a jackpot game performance (jackpot opening performance, round performance, jackpot ending performance), customer waiting performance, operation performance, and pre-reading performance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100, is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 44. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1ms period is input to the production control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the production control microcomputer 121 creates first production button switch data based on the detection signal from the first production button sensor 40a. The performance control microcomputer 121 creates second performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the second performance button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the production control microcomputer 121 uses the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the image production, etc. is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control time related to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the production control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 10ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 45. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process, the production control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process to analyze the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described later.

The production control microcomputer 121 performs audio control processing after the received command analysis processing (S4202). In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161 based on the performance content indicated by the special figure variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124. is output.

The performance control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process after the audio control process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the performance contents indicated by the special symbol variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124, and the like.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be explained using FIGS. 46 and 47. In the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the gaming control board 100, in other words, it has received a start winning command. It is determined whether the data has been stored in the buffer (S4301). If the performance control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a starting winning process in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. In the starting winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command pending storage section 125 in the performance RAM 124. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored starting winning command and determines whether or not to execute a pre-read performance that indicates the expected level of jackpot. In addition to a pending notice in which a pending icon is displayed in a special manner, the pre-reading effect includes a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these pre-read effects, a pre-read effect start command for executing the decided effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing a prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. Sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading effect using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (performing a pre-reading effect using light emission). It is possible to operate 55k (execute a pre-read effect by operation).

In step S4303, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if it has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the production control microcomputer 121 transfers the symbol designation command to the production RAM 124. The symbol designation command is stored in the symbol designation command storage section 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure variation start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process advances to step S4307, while if the special figure variation start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure variation production are determined. , performs a special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect.

In the special figure variation production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage section 127 in the production RAM 124. Next, based on the contents of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, losing special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, the production symbol EZ1 is stopped and displayed. -EZ3, and a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination for determining small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special symbols and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, the values of random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for stop symbol pattern determination with the selected stop symbol pattern table and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a no-reach variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to result in a so-called "missing pattern". In addition, if the special symbol variation pattern is a reach/loss variation, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to The KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected to form a so-called "Zero" according to the production mode and the type of jackpot symbol. .

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 generates a special figure fluctuation performance pattern in which the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance are associated, based on the performance mode in which it is staying and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. Select a special figure variation performance pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation performance pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation performance pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special symbol variation production pattern determination table that is associated with the special symbol variation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment table, the value of the random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation performance pattern Judgment values) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination as a random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination, and selects a special figure based on the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination. Performs fluctuation performance pattern judgment.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for determining the special pattern variation performance pattern with the selected special pattern variation performance pattern table in the special pattern variation performance pattern determination, determines the special pattern variation performance pattern, and determines the special pattern variation performance pattern. At the same time, the data representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern (special figure fluctuation performance pattern data) representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation performance start command indicating the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes a predetermined command from the image ROM 142. The special figure variation effect is performed using the image on the display section 50a of the image display device 50.

Further, the special figure variation performance start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using the images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using the sound output from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using the light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance content of the figure fluctuation performance and the performance content of the special figure fluctuation performance based on the operation performed by the board movable body 55k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs audio via the audio control circuit 161 (executes the special figure variation effect using audio), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executes the special figure variation effect by emitting light). (performs a variable effect), and operates the board movable body 55k (executes a special figure variable effect by operation).

In step S4307, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special symbol fluctuation stops. A special symbol variation performance end process (S4308) is performed to end the performance (stop the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform a stop display).

In the special pattern fluctuation performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special pattern fluctuation stop command, and ends the special pattern fluctuation performance appropriately based on the analysis result (performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and small pattern KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variable display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the gaming state command (NO in S4309), it proceeds to step S4311, whereas if it has received the gaming state command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the gaming state command. , identifies the gaming state represented by the gaming state command, and performs a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state (S4310).

The production control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 in the gaming state setting process. For example, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "00H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state. Further, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "01H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a high probability high base gaming state. Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag "02H" in the gaming state flag area of the performance RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a low probability high base gaming state.

In step S4311, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if it has received the customer waiting command (YES in S4311), it performs customer waiting performance standby processing. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting performance standby process, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the waiting time (customer waiting performance waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the performance pattern to the start of the customer waiting performance. Set it on the timer. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has elapsed, and if it determines that the waiting time has elapsed, it sends a customer waiting performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the customer waiting performance. set in the output buffer of

In step S4313, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, whereas if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the production control microcomputer 121 executes the jackpot with the start of the opening of the jackpot game. Opening performance start processing is performed (S4314).

In the jackpot opening production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command, and based on the analysis result, determines whether to execute the jackpot opening production according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on. If it is to be executed, select the performance content (jackpot opening performance pattern) of the jackpot opening performance, and output a jackpot opening performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the jackpot opening performance with the selected jackpot opening performance pattern. Set in buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether the number of rounds designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the number of rounds designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the number of rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), round production start processing is performed in conjunction with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round performance start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the number of rounds designation command, determines whether or not to execute a round production according to the round game to be started from now on, and if it is to be executed, executes the round production. The performance content (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4317, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is finished, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending performance start process ( After performing S4318) and production mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

In the jackpot ending production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending production according to the ending of the jackpot game that will be executed from now on. The performance content (jackpot ending performance pattern) of the jackpot ending performance is selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a process of setting the performance mode after the jackpot game (setting the performance mode) based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command, in the performance mode setting process. control processing).

For example, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the production control microcomputer 121 sets it to a probability variable production mode that suggests a high probability high base gaming state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the variable performance mode start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , displays the background image G120 for probability variation as a background image, and outputs the BGM for probability variation as BGM.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, or jackpot symbol E, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects either a high probability high base gaming state or a low probability high base gaming state. Set a time-saving production mode in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the performance mode flag indicating the time-saving performance mode in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and sends a time-saving performance mode start command indicating that the time-saving performance mode is set to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Set to . When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described as the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment is composed of a so-called "one-type, two-type mixed machine." In one pachinko game machine PY1, when a special drawing 1 lottery is held and a jackpot is won, mainly triggered by the winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, the first winning opening 14, which will be described later, is opened. There is a specification called "Type 1 (so-called "DigiPachi type")" in which a jackpot game is executed, and a special drawing 2 lottery is held when the game ball enters the second starting hole 12, resulting in a small win. If you win, a small winning game in which the second big prize opening 15 (described later) is opened is executed, and the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 opened in the small winning game is placed in a specific area 16 (so-called "V zone"), which will be described later. ”) (so-called “V winning”), a jackpot game is executed.

Here, FIG. 48 shows a front view of the game board 1 of the pachinko game machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 48, the gaming area 6 includes a first grand prize device 14D and a second grand prize device 15D that can be reversibly changed between a state in which game balls cannot win and a state in which they can win. is provided.

The first big winning device 14D is provided directly below the first starting winning device 11D, and has an operable first AT opening/closing member 14k and a non-specific mode (closed) in which the game ball cannot be won by the first AT opening/closing member 14k. It is equipped with a first grand prize opening 14 that can be changed to a specific mode (opening mode) in which a prize can be won.

The first AT opening/closing member 14k is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular plate shape, and its short side direction is parallel to the front-rear direction and its long side direction is horizontal right below the first starting winning device 11D. It is arranged so that the right side is higher than the left side along the direction and parallel to the slope direction with a gentle slope, and is configured to be able to move linearly in the front and rear direction.

In the normal standby state, the first AT opening/closing member 14k has its front end flush with the gaming area 6 (the front of the gaming board 1). Then, when the first AT opening/closing member 14k is held in a standby state, the game ball flowing down from the upper side of the first AT opening/closing member 14k toward the lower side passes directly in front of the first AT opening/closing member 14k. The first AT opening/closing member 14k moves downward.

Further, the first AT opening/closing member 14k can move forward (protrude forward) from the standby state in the operating state. When the first AT opening/closing member 14k is held in the operating state, the game ball flowing downward from the upper side of the first AT opening/closing member 14k is stopped by the first AT opening/closing member 14k. It moves diagonally downward to the left above the first AT opening/closing member 14k, is collected as it is from the first AT collection port 14h adjacent to the left side of the first AT opening/closing member 14k, and is discharged to the outside of the gaming area 6. Then, collection of the game ball from the first AT collection port 14h constitutes winning of the game ball to the first big winning port 14.

Since it is possible to collect game balls from the first AT collection port 14h when the first AT opening/closing member 14k is in the operating state, the part where the first AT opening/closing member 14k is arranged in the gaming area 6 is the part where the first AT opening/closing member 14k is placed. It is assumed that the mouth 14 is configured. Further, it is assumed that the first AT collection port 14h also constitutes a part of the first large prize winning port 14. Note that the first AT collection port 14h is provided with a first big winning hole sensor 14a that detects that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 (winning).

In this way, the first AT opening/closing member 14k is reversibly changeable between the standby state and the operating state, and when the first AT opening/closing member 14k is in the standby state, the first big prize opening 14 is opened so that the game ball enters the prize. It takes an impossible non-specific mode (closed mode), and when the first AT opening/closing member 14k is in the operating state, the first big prize opening 14 takes a specific mode (open mode) in which a game ball can win. In addition, in the first embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out in conjunction with winning into the first big winning hole 14.

The second big prize winning device 15D is provided almost directly below the right end of the center decoration body 61 and diagonally above the right of the first big winning device 14D, and includes an operable second AT opening/closing member 15k and a second AT opening/closing member 15k. The game ball is provided with a second grand prize opening 15 that can be changed into a non-specific mode (closed mode) in which winning is not possible and a specific mode (open mode) in which winning is possible.

The second AT opening/closing member 15k is formed into a vertically long rectangular plate shape, and is located approximately directly below the right end of the center decorative body 61 and diagonally above the right of the first big prize winning device 14D, with its short side extending in the front-rear direction. They are parallel to each other, and their long sides are arranged parallel to an inclination direction where the right side is higher than the left side along the horizontal direction and the slope is gentler, and is configured to be able to move in a straight line in the front and back direction. There is.

In the normal standby state, the second AT opening/closing member 15k has its front end protruding from the gaming area 6 (the front of the gaming board 1). When the second AT opening/closing member 15k is held in a standby state, the game ball flowing downward from the upper side of the second AT opening/closing member 15k is stopped by the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and then the second AT opening/closing member 15k is stopped by the second AT opening/closing member 15k. It moves diagonally downward to the left above the opening/closing member 15k, and further flows downstream from the second AT opening/closing member 15k in the gaming area 6.

Further, the second AT opening/closing member 15k can be moved back from the standby state as an operating state. When the second AT opening/closing member 15k is held in the operating state, its front end is flush with the gaming area 6 (the front of the game board 1), so that the second AT opening/closing member 15k is moved from the upper side to the lower side. The game ball flowing downward passes directly in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k and moves to the lower side of the second AT opening/closing member 15k. Then, the passage of the game ball in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k constitutes the winning of the game ball into the second grand prize opening 15.

When the second AT opening/closing member 15k is in the operating state, the game ball can pass in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k, so the part where the second AT opening/closing member 15k is arranged in the gaming area 6 is the part where the second AT opening/closing member 15k is placed. It is assumed that the mouth 15 is configured. Therefore, entering the game ball into the second grand prize opening 15 constitutes winning the second grand prize opening 15. In addition, a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15 (winning) is provided at a position immediately below the second AT opening/closing member 15k. A game ball that passes in front of the 2AT opening/closing member 15k and moves downward is always detected by the second big prize opening sensor 15a.

In this way, the second AT opening/closing member 15k can reversibly change between the standby state and the operating state, and when the second AT opening/closing member 15k is in the standby state, the second big prize opening 15 allows the game ball to enter the prize. When the second AT opening/closing member 15k is in the operating state, the second big prize opening 15 takes a specific mode (open mode) in which the game ball can win (enter). Take. In addition, in the first embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out when a prize is entered into the second grand prize opening 15.

Next, a description will be given of what happens after the game ball enters (enters) the second grand prize opening 15. The game board 1 is equipped with a specific area device 16D that can be reached by a game ball that has won (entered) the second big prize opening 15, in other words, a game ball that has passed in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k. As shown in FIG. 48, the specific area device 16D is installed substantially below the second AT opening/closing member 15k. A path 16R (specific area guidance path 16R) is formed between the second AT opening/closing member 15k and the specific area device 16D for guiding the game ball that has passed in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k to the specific area device 16D. . Therefore, the game ball that has passed in front of the second AT opening/closing member 15k is guided to the specific area device 16D by the specific area guiding path 16R.

The specific area device 16D includes an operable distribution member 16k and a specific area that can be changed into a non-specific mode (closed mode) in which the game ball cannot pass through and a specific mode (open mode) in which the game ball can pass through. A region 16 is provided.

Although not directly shown in FIG. 48, the distribution member 16k is formed into a vertically long rectangular plate shape, and its long side direction is parallel to the front-rear direction, and its short side direction is parallel to the left-right direction. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the , and is configured to be able to move linearly in the front and rear directions.

In the normal standby state, the distributing member 16k has its front end protruding from the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). When the distribution member 16k is held in a standby state, the game balls flowing down from the upper side of the distribution member 16k to the lower side collide with the distribution member 16k, and then further in the game area 6. It flows downstream from the distribution member 16k.

Moreover, the distribution member 16k can be moved back from the standby state as an operating state. When the distribution member 16k is held in the operating state, its front end is flush with the game area 6 (the front of the game board 1), so that the distribution member 16k is moved from the upper side to the lower side. The game ball flowing down passes directly in front of the distribution member 16k and moves to the lower side of the distribution member 16k. The passage of the game ball in front of the distribution member 16k constitutes the passage of the game ball through the specific area 16.

When the distribution member 16k is in the operating state, it is possible for the game ball to pass in front of the distribution member 16k, so the portion of the game area 6 where the distribution member 16k is arranged constitutes the specific area 16. It shall be. In addition, a specific area sensor 16a that detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "V winning") is provided at a position immediately below the distribution member 16k. Therefore, the game balls that have moved to the lower side of the distribution member 16k are always detected by the specific area sensor 16a.

In this way, the distribution member 16k can reversibly change between the standby state and the operating state, and when the distribution member 16k is in the standby state, the specific area 16 is a non-specific area through which game balls cannot pass. When the distribution member 16k is in operation, the specific area 16 takes a specific mode (open mode) through which game balls can pass.

Further, in the first embodiment, the second starting prize winning device 12D is provided on the right side of the substantially center in the vertical direction in the lower half of the center decorative body 61 and substantially above the second AT opening/closing member 15k.

The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is formed into a substantially vertically elongated rectangular plate shape, and its short side is parallel to the front-back direction, and its long side is parallel to the left side along the horizontal direction. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the direction of the slope, which is high and has a gentle slope, and is configured to be able to move linearly in the front and back direction.

In the normal standby state, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k has its front end flush with the gaming area 6 (the front of the gaming board 1). When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in a standby state, the game ball flowing downward from the upper side of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k passes directly in front of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k. Move to the lower side of the electric tube opening/closing member 12k.

In addition, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k can move forward (protrude forward) from the standby state in the operating state. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in an operating state, the game ball flowing downward from the upper side of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is stopped by the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, and when stopped, the game ball flows downward from the upper side of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k. It moves diagonally downward to the left above the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, is collected as it is from the electric chew collecting port 12h adjacent to the left side of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, and is discharged to the outside of the gaming area 6. Collecting this game ball from the electric chew collecting port 12h constitutes winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12.

When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the operating state, it is possible to collect the game balls from the electric chew collecting port 12h, so that the part where the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is arranged in the gaming area 6 is the second starting opening. 12. Further, it is assumed that the electric chew recovery port 12h also constitutes a part of the second starting port 12. In addition, the electric chew collection port 12h is provided with a second starting port sensor 12a that detects that the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (winning).

In this way, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k can reversibly change between the standby state and the operating state, and when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the standby state, the second starting port 12 is opened so that the game ball does not win. It takes a possible non-specific mode (closed mode), and when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in an operating state, the second starting port 12 takes a specific mode (open mode) in which a game ball can be won.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center of the center decoration body 61 in the vertical direction and substantially above the second starting port 12 (the electric tube opening/closing member 12k). In addition, the right game area 6B is configured so that the game balls can flow down to the left and right sides of the gate 13, but if you continue to shoot the game balls with the right hand, the gate 13, the left side, and the right side of the gate 13 will fall. The game ball is configured so that the game ball reaches the gate 13 most frequently. That is, the right game area 6B is configured such that most of the game balls that are fired by hitting the right hand and enter the right game area 6B, in other words, most of the game balls that reach the right side of the center decorative body 61 pass through the gate 13. There is.

Furthermore, the right game area 6B is configured so that the game ball that passes through the gate 13 always reaches the electric chew opening/closing member 12k. Therefore, when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the operating state, most of the game balls that have entered the right gaming area 6B are blocked by the electric chew opening/closing member 12k and collected from the electric chew collection port 12h. As a result, the second AT opening/closing member 15k cannot be reached. In addition, the configuration may be such that the game ball passing through the gate 13 may not be able to reach the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

Furthermore, the game ball that has passed in front of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k in the standby state, in other words, the gaming ball that has passed through the predetermined position where the second starting port 12 is formed in the gaming area 6, is the second AT opening/closing member 15k. However, in the right gaming area 6B (game board unit YU), the gaming ball entering the right gaming area 6B is located in front of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k (at a predetermined position where the second starting port 12 is formed). ) is configured such that the average value of the time from passing through to reaching the second AT opening/closing member 15k is 1 second. However, this average value can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, the right gaming area 6B (gaming board unit YU) enters the right gaming area 6B and collides with the second AT opening/closing member 15k in the standby state, and the game ball that moves downstream from there hits the first AT opening/closing member 14k. configured to be reachable.

As mentioned above, when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, the first AT opening/closing member 14k, the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and the distribution member 16k are in the operating state, the winning to the second starting port 12 and the first grand prize are not possible. It becomes possible to win a prize in the opening 14, win a prize in the second large prize winning opening 15, and pass through the specific area 16. In the following, the fact that it is possible to win a prize in the second starting opening 12, to win a prize in the first grand prize opening 14, to win a prize in the second grand prize opening 15, and to pass through the specific area 16 will be referred to as "opening". There is also. On the other hand, the fact that it is impossible to win a prize in the second starting opening 12, to win a prize in the first grand prize opening 14, to win a prize in the second grand prize opening 15, and to pass through the specific area 16 is referred to as "closed". There is also.

Next, the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 49, the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s are connected to the game control board 100 so that the signals output from the game control board 100 can be input.

The first AT solenoid 14s is also connected to the first AT opening/closing member 14k, and is driven based on a signal from the game control board 100 to operate the first AT opening/closing member 14k to enter a standby state and an operating state (first big prize winning state). The mouth 14 is switched between a mode in which winnings are not possible (closed) and a mode in which winnings are possible (open). The second AT solenoid 15s is also connected to the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and is driven based on a signal from the game control board 100 to operate the second AT opening/closing member 15k to enter a standby state and an operating state (second big prize winning state). The mouth 15 is switched between a mode in which winnings are not possible (closed) and a mode in which winnings are possible (open). The distribution solenoid 16s is also connected to the distribution member 16k, and is driven based on a signal from the game control board 100, and operates the distribution member 16k to switch between the standby state and the operating state (no passing through the specific area 16). Switch between a possible mode (closed) and a passable mode (open).

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to the aforementioned first big winning hole sensor 14a, second big winning hole sensor 15a, and specific area sensor 16a so as to be able to output signals to the game control board 100.

When the first big winning hole sensor 14a detects a game ball, it outputs a signal (first big winning hole detection signal) indicating that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 to the game control board 100. When the second big winning hole sensor 15a detects a game ball, it outputs a signal (second big winning hole detection signal) indicating that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15 to the game control board 100. When the specific area sensor 16a detects the game ball, it outputs a signal (specific area detection signal) indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning) to the game control board 100.

Next, the game states that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. In the pachinko game machine PY1, only one type of gaming state, the normal probability state, is set as the gaming state related to the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination. On the other hand, as the gaming states related to the winning ease of the second starting opening 12, a non-time saving state (low base state) and a time saving state (high base state) are set, as in the basic embodiment. Therefore, hereinafter, the low probability low base gaming state will be referred to as the "normal gaming state", and the low probability high base gaming state will simply be referred to as the "time saving state".

Next, the probability of being determined to be a "win" in the hit determination according to the first embodiment, the common symbol fluctuation time, and the auxiliary game will be explained. In the first embodiment, the probability of being determined as a "win" in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) is set to 1%, and the probability of being determined as "winning" in the time saving state is 99%. is set to . In addition, the regular figure fluctuation time in the time saving state is set to 30 seconds regardless of the hit determination result, and the regular figure fluctuation time in the time saving state is set to 3 seconds regardless of the hit determination result.

Further, the number of openings of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game based on the stop display of winning symbols in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) is one time, and the opening time is set to 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, the number of openings of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game based on the stop display of winning symbols in the time saving state is one time, and the opening time is set to 3.0 seconds.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, in the normal gaming state, the game ball continues to be fired by hitting the left hand and the game ball enters the first starting port 11, but in the time saving state, the game ball continues to be fired by hitting the right hand and the game ball enters the second starting port 11. It is configured so that it is easier to win a prize in the 12th prize.

Next, jackpot determination according to the first embodiment will be explained. A configuration example of the jackpot determination table referred to in the jackpot determination according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 50(A). As shown in FIG. 50(A), as a jackpot judgment table, a jackpot judgment table (first jackpot judgment table) related to special drawing 1 used in jackpot judgment (first jackpot judgment) based on winning in the first starting opening 11 is used. ) and a jackpot judgment table (second jackpot judgment table) related to the special drawings 2 used in jackpot judgment (second jackpot judgment) based on winnings in the second starting opening 12.

According to the first jackpot determination table, in the first jackpot determination, either a jackpot or a loss is determined. On the other hand, according to the second jackpot determination table, in the second jackpot determination, one of a jackpot, a small win, and a loss is determined. As will be described later, when a small win is won, a stop display of the special figure 2 in a mode indicating a small win is executed, and a small win game is executed in accordance with the stop display. Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the jackpot game is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(A), in the first jackpot determination, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is set to 1/319. On the other hand, in the second jackpot determination, the probability of determining a jackpot is set to 1/319, and the probability of determining a small win is set to 80/319 (≈1/4). As in the basic embodiment, in each jackpot judgment table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is shown in FIG. They are distributed appropriately to achieve the selectivity shown. However, the jackpot selection rate and the small win selection rate are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the first jackpot determination, a small win may be included as a jackpot determination result. Alternatively, in the second jackpot determination, the jackpot determination result may not include a jackpot.

Next, the jackpot symbol and the small prize symbol according to the first embodiment will be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of jackpot as well as the jackpot win. The jackpot symbol is determined by jackpot symbol type determination, and the jackpot symbol type determination is performed using a jackpot symbol type determination table. FIG. 50(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50(B), three types of jackpot symbols, jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, are provided as the jackpot symbol of special drawing 1. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special drawing 1, jackpot symbol A is selected with a probability of 10%, jackpot symbol B is selected with a probability of 45%, and jackpot symbol C is selected with a probability of 45%. Moreover, one type of jackpot symbol D is provided as the jackpot symbol of the special drawing 2. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special figure 2, the jackpot symbol D is selected with a probability of 100%.

In addition, the small winning symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of small winning as well as the small winning. In the special symbol variable display when a small hit is won, the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a derivation of the result of the jackpot determination. The small winning symbol is determined by small winning symbol type determination, and the small winning symbol type determination is performed using a small winning symbol type determination table. FIG. 50(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the small winning symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50(C), two types of small winning symbols, a small winning symbol A and a small winning symbol B, are provided as the small winning symbols of the special drawing 2. According to the small winning symbol type determination table related to special figure 2, the small winning symbol A is selected with a probability of 50%, and the small winning symbol B is selected with a probability of 50%.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 related determination information includes, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol random number, jackpot symbol type random number, reach random number, and special symbol variation pattern random number, a small number for determining the small hit symbol type. It also includes the winning symbol type random number. Therefore, a small winning symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS) related to the small winning symbol type random number is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a small winning symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS) Like the special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T) and the jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), is updated in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). Then, in step S211, the game control microcomputer 101 also acquires the small winning symbol type random number as the special figure 2 related determination information and stores it in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104. Note that the range of the small winning symbol type random number can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, it is set to "0 to 255".

In addition, in the small winning symbol type determination table, the determination value of the small winning symbol type random number (small winning symbol type random number determination value) is shown in FIG. 50 (C) for the small winning symbol type that is the result of the small winning symbol type determination. They are distributed appropriately to achieve the selectivity shown. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 determines the type of the small winning symbol by comparing the acquired small winning symbol type random number with the small winning symbol type determination table, as will be described later.

In addition, the number of jackpot symbol types and the number of small hit symbol types, the selection rate of each jackpot symbol type, and the selection rate of each small win symbol type related to special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 are the same as in the first embodiment. The value is not limited to , and may be set as appropriate.

Next, a jackpot game according to the first embodiment will be explained. In the first embodiment, in the jackpot game, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small win game that is executed after the small win symbol is stopped and displayed, the game ball that has won the second jackpot 15 opened is It is executed when the specific area 16 is passed (V winning). Therefore, the jackpot game components that make up the jackpot game, in other words, the jackpot game control table for controlling the jackpot game, are based on the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, in detail, the jackpot symbol that is the trigger for executing the jackpot game. It is associated with the type and the type of small winning symbol.

Note that even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16, the jackpot game will not be executed. Therefore, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the direct trigger for executing the jackpot game is when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, but if the game ball does not enter the second big prize opening 15, the game ball It is not possible to pass through the specific area 16, and winning in the second big prize opening 15 is possible when the second big winning opening 15 is open, and opening the second big winning opening 15 is a small winning game. Therefore, the stopping display of small winning symbols is also included in the trigger for executing the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the following, the stop display of the small winning symbol is referred to as "hitting a small hit/becoming a small hit", and the stopping display of a jackpot symbol and the game ball passing through the specific area 16 are referred to as "hitting a jackpot". It is sometimes called "It's going to be a big hit."

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the jackpot game component is also associated with whether or not it is a jackpot game related to a "limiter" which will be described later. The details of the "limiter" will be described later, but in the first embodiment, after the normal gaming state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is entered until the special figure variable display becomes executable in the normal gaming state. The number of times the jackpot game is executed based on the stop display of jackpot symbols and the stop display of small win symbols is limited to two. This limited number of times (2 times) is called a "limiter." Then, the jackpot game executed based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol and the stop display of the small win symbol in the second time saving state corresponds to the jackpot game related to the limiter.

In addition, below, a jackpot game related to a limiter will be referred to as a "limiter jackpot game", and a jackpot game that is not a jackpot game related to a limiter will be referred to as a "non-limiter jackpot game". Furthermore, reaching the limit number of times is referred to as "activation of the limiter/activation of the limiter."

FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot game control table associated with each special symbol type when the jackpot game corresponds to a non-limiter jackpot game, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot game control table associated with each special symbol type when the jackpot game corresponds to a limiter jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 51(A) and 51(B), the number of executions of the round game in the jackpot game associated with each special symbol type is regardless of whether it is a jackpot game related to a limiter or not. constant. Specifically, the number of times the round game related to the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game") is executed is four times, and the round game associated with jackpot symbol B is executed four times. (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game") and the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), the number of times the round game is executed is 8, and The jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as the "fourth jackpot game"), the jackpot game associated with the small prize symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as the "fifth jackpot game"), and the small win The number of times the round game related to the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game") associated with symbol B is executed is 10 times.

In addition, the fifth jackpot game is a small winning game (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game") that is executed based on the stop display of the small winning symbol A, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, This is executed in response to the end of the small winning game. On the other hand, in the sixth jackpot game, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the small winning game (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game") that is executed based on the stop display of the small winning symbol B, the sixth jackpot game This is executed in response to the completion of the 2-bit win game.

Further, in the first embodiment, the jackpot game component also includes the type of jackpot opening to be opened. As shown in FIGS. 51(A) and 51(B), in all round games of all jackpot games, regardless of whether or not it is a jackpot game related to a limiter, and regardless of the special symbol type, The first grand prize opening 14 is set to be open. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 51(A) and 51(B), all rounds of all jackpot games, regardless of whether or not it is a jackpot game related to a limiter, and regardless of the special symbol type. Regarding the game, the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 in the round game is set to 1, the time for each opening (opening time) is set to 29.5 seconds, and the time for closing after opening (closing time) is set to 29.5 seconds. time) is set to 2.0 seconds. Note that the closing time is not set for the last round game in each jackpot game. This is because, after the opening of the first grand prize opening 14 related to the last round game is completed, an ending is performed in which the first grand prize opening 14 is kept closed.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the opening time ("OP time" in FIG. 51) of all jackpot games is 10.0, regardless of whether it is a jackpot game related to a limiter or not, and regardless of the special symbol type. It is set to seconds. On the other hand, for limiter jackpot games, the ending time ("ED time" in Figure 51) of all jackpot games is set to 10.0 seconds regardless of the special symbol type, but for non-limiter jackpot games Regardless of the special symbol type, the ending time of all jackpot games is set to 0.0 seconds. In other words, in a limiter jackpot game, the ending is executed after the last round game regardless of the special symbol type, but in a non-limiter jackpot game, the ending is executed after the last round game ends regardless of the special symbol type. The jackpot game ends without being executed. As will be described later, in the first embodiment, the non-limiter jackpot game is positioned as a jackpot game in the middle stage until the limiter is activated, and by not executing the ending in the jackpot game in the middle stage, the limiter jackpot game is This is to make a set of a plurality of jackpot games including the jackpot game related to the above-mentioned jackpot game appear as one jackpot game.

Next, a small winning game according to the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls small winning games using a small winning game control table. The small winning game control table includes a small winning game large winning opening control table related to the control of the large winning opening (first large winning opening 14, second large winning opening 15), and a small winning game large winning opening control table related to the control of the specific area 16. There is a specific area control table.

The small winning game large winning opening control table includes elements (first small winning game constituent elements) that constitute the small winning game related to opening and closing of the large winning opening (first large winning opening 14, second large winning opening 15). Stored. The first small winning game component includes the type of big winning hole to be opened, the number of times the big winning hole is opened in the small winning game, the opening time for each opening (opening pattern), and the time to be closed until the next opening (closing). time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time). The small winning game large winning opening control table (first small winning game component) is associated with the type of special symbol, more specifically, with the small winning symbol type.

FIG. 52(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning game large winning opening control table relating to each small winning symbol type. As shown in FIG. 52(A), the small winning game large winning opening control table is set to be the same regardless of the small winning symbol type. That is, the first small winning game and the second small winning game are controlled in the same way regarding the big winning opening (first big winning opening 14, second big winning opening 15). Further, the second large prize opening 15 is set to be opened for all openings of all small winning games, regardless of the small winning symbol type.

Further, the number of openings of the second large prize opening 15 in the small winning game associated with each small winning symbol type is set to 15 times. The opening time of the second big prize opening 15 for all 15 times in the small winning game associated with each small winning symbol type is set to 0.12 seconds. However, the closing time from the end of opening of the second big winning hole 15 of the small winning game corresponding to each small winning symbol type until the next opening starts is the opening of the second big winning hole 15. It depends on the order. Specifically, for the small winning game associated with any small winning symbol type, the closing time after the first opening of the second big prize opening 15 is set to 2.5 seconds, and the closing time after the second opening is set to 2.5 seconds. The subsequent closing time is set to 1.5 seconds, and the closing time after the 3rd to 14th opening is set to 0.6 seconds. The reason why the closing time of the second big prize opening 15 related to the small winning game in the time saving state differs depending on the opening order of the second big winning opening 15 will be described later.

Further, the opening time of the small winning game ("OPO time" in FIG. 52) is set to 3.0 seconds regardless of the small winning symbol type. Furthermore, the ending time of the small winning game is set to 2.0 seconds regardless of the small winning symbol type.

Next, control regarding the opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the small winning game, that is, the operation of the distribution member 16k will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the small winning game, that is, the operation of the distribution member 16k, using the small winning game specific area control table. The small winning game specific area control table stores elements (second small winning game constituent elements) constituting a small winning game related to opening and closing of the specific area 16. The second small winning game component includes a time period for opening the specific area 16 that was held in a closed state (activating the distribution member 16k that was held in a standby state) based on the time when the small winning game was started. and the time to close the specific area 16 that has been kept open (the time to return the distribution member 16k that has been activated to the standby state). The small winning game specific area control table (second small winning game component) is associated with the type of special symbol, more specifically, with the small winning symbol type.

FIG. 52(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning game specific area control table for each small winning symbol type. As shown in FIG. 52(B), the small winning game specific area control table is set to be the same regardless of the small winning symbol type. That is, opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the first small winning game (operation of the distribution member 16k) and opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the second small winning game (operation of the distribution member 16s) are controlled in the same way.

In the first small winning game and the second small winning game, the specific area 16 opens when 3.0 seconds have elapsed since the small winning game was started. This time corresponds to the time when the opening ends, in other words, the time when the first opening of the second big prize opening 15 starts (see FIG. 52(A)). In the first small winning game and the second small winning game, the specific area 16 is closed when 18.0 seconds have elapsed since the small winning game was started. This time corresponds to the time when 2.0 seconds have passed since the last opening of the second grand prize opening 15 was completed (see FIG. 52(A)). In this way, the specific area 16 opens at the same timing as the first opening of the second grand prize opening 15, and at the timing when 2.0 seconds have passed after the last opening of the second grand prize opening 15 ends. Close.

Next, details of the control contents of the small winning game will be explained using FIG. 53. As mentioned above, in the first small winning game and the second small winning game, the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 15 and the opening and closing of the specific area 16 are controlled in the same way. Hereinafter, the first small winning game and the second small winning game may be simply referred to as "small winning game." FIG. 53 is a time chart showing the control details of the small winning game. In addition, in FIG. 53, the second big prize opening 15 is written as "2nd AT", the specific area 16 is written as "VAT", and the opening of the small winning game is written as "OP". , the ending of a small winning game is written as "ED".

When the "small winning symbol (small winning symbol A, small winning symbol B)" is stopped and displayed as the stop display of the special figure 2, a small winning game is played. As shown in FIG. 53, in response to the start of the small winning game, an opening is first performed in which the second big prize opening 15 is kept closed. This opening continues until 3.0 seconds have passed since it started. When the opening ends, the second grand prize opening 15 starts to be opened for the first time. The first opening of the second grand prize opening 15 continues until 0.12 seconds have elapsed since it started.

When the second big prize opening 15 closes after the first opening of the second big prize opening 15, the closing continues for 2.5 seconds, and when 2.5 seconds have passed from the start of the closing, the second big prize opening 15 closes. The second opening of the two major prize openings 15 begins. The second opening of the second grand prize opening 15 also continues until 0.12 seconds have elapsed since the opening.

When the second big winning hole 15 is closed after the second opening of the second big winning hole 15 is completed, the closing continues for 1.5 seconds, and when 1.5 seconds have passed from the start of the closing, the second big winning hole 15 closes. The third opening of the two major prize openings 15 begins. After that, the opening of the second grand prize opening 15 for 0.12 seconds and the subsequent closing for 0.6 seconds are repeated 12 times, and finally the opening is performed for the 15th time. The 15th opening of the second grand prize opening 15 also continues until 0.12 seconds have elapsed since the opening. Then, when the final (15th) opening of the second grand prize opening 15 is completed, the second grand prize opening 15 is closed and an ending is performed in which the closed state is maintained. This ending continues until 2.0 seconds have passed since it started, and the small winning game (first small winning game, second small winning game) ends when the ending ends.

In this way, in the small winning game, the second large prize opening 15 can be opened 15 times in total. In the small winning game, the opening time of the second big prize opening 15 is all 0.12 seconds, but the closing time between the first opening and the second opening is 2.5 seconds, and the second opening time is 0.12 seconds. The closing time between opening and third opening is 1.5 seconds, and subsequent closing times are short and common at 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the period until the second big winning hole 15 is opened for the third time in the small winning game, the frequency of opening of the second big winning hole 15 is relatively low.In other words, the unit of the second big winning hole 15 is relatively low. The opening time per hour is relatively short, and in the period after the third opening of the second big prize opening 15 of the small winning game, the opening frequency of the second big prize opening 15 is relatively high, in other words, the second The opening time of the big prize opening 15 per unit time is relatively long. That is, the period after the opening of the second big prize opening 15 for the third time in the small winning game can be positioned as the period in which the opening of the second big prize opening 15 is carried out in earnest. Therefore, in the small winning game, the period from when the second big prize opening 15 starts opening for the first time until just before the third opening starts, the opening of the second big winning opening 15 is passively or The period from the start of the third opening of the second big prize opening 15 until the end of the fifteenth opening is called the "small winning opening passive period" which is executed informally. It is also sometimes referred to as the ``small winning opening active period'' in which opening is actively or in full swing.

Moreover, the opening of the specific area 16 related to the small winning game starts at the timing when the opening ends and the first opening of the second big prize opening 15 starts. Thereafter, while the second big prize opening 15 is repeatedly opened and closed, the specific area 16 is continuously opened. Then, when 18.0 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, in other words, at the timing when the ending ends, the opening of the specific area 16 ends and the specific area 16 closes.

Note that, like the round game of the jackpot game, the number of winning game balls is also specified for the small win games (first small win game, second small win game). This number is also referred to as the "specified number of prizes to win," and in the first embodiment, the prescribed number of prizes to be won for the small winning game is set to 10, which is the same as the prescribed number of prizes to be won for the round game. Therefore, when 10 game balls win in the second big prize opening 15 in the small winning game, the second big prize opening 15 is closed at that point, and the ending starts from that point.

Next, using FIG. 54, the interference of the auxiliary game with respect to winning in the second large prize opening 15 in the small winning game will be explained. FIG. 54 is a time chart for explaining a specific example of the interference of the auxiliary game with respect to winning in the second large prize opening 15 in the small winning game. In addition, in FIG. 54, the second starting opening 12 is written as "electronic chew", and the second big winning opening 15 is written as "second AT", and it is indicated that the game ball passes through the specific area 16. It will be written as "V winning", the opening of the small winning game will be written as "OP", and the ending of the small winning game will be written as "ED".

As described above, the second starting hole 12 and the second big winning hole 15 are provided in the right gaming area 6B, and the second starting hole 12 is arranged upstream of the second big winning hole 15. Then, in the auxiliary game, when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k operates, the second starting port 12 opens (making it possible to win a prize in the second starting opening 12), but on the other hand, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the operating state. When the game ball is held in the electric chew opening/closing member 12k, the game ball attempting to pass through the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is prevented from flowing downstream by the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

Here, if the handle 72k continues to be operated, one game ball is fired at a cycle of approximately 0.6 seconds, and most of the game balls that enter the right game area 6B pass through the gate 13, and in the time saving state. Since there is a 99% probability that the winning result will be determined as a "win" in the lottery, in a situation where the firing is continued with right-handed firing, during the period when the second starting port 12 is closed, This may be the period during which the general map variable display is being performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the closing of the second starting port 12 corresponding to the variable display of normal figures for 3 seconds and the opening of the second starting port 12 for 3 seconds related to the auxiliary game can be repeated. Therefore, the game ball that passes in front of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k during the 3 second period when the second starting port 12 is closed becomes a game ball that can win the second big winning port 15.

In addition, since the average value of the time from when the game ball entering the right game area 6B passes through the electric chew opening/closing member 12k until it reaches the second AT opening/closing member 15k is 1 second, the second starting port 12 is opened. 1 second after the period in which the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the operating state is a period in which the game ball cannot reach the second grand prize opening 15, in other words, the second grand prize opening 15 This is the period during which winnings are prohibited. Therefore, hereinafter, the period during which winnings to the second large winning opening 15 are inhibited will be referred to as the "second AT winning inhibition period".

By the way, even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving state and the small winning game is started, the time saving state continues as it is. Then, in the small winning game, in response to the game ball passing through the specific area 16 (V winning), the time saving state shifts to the normal game state. Therefore, even if the small winning game starts, a second AT winning inhibition period lasting 3 seconds occurs at 3 second intervals until the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning). Therefore, it is not possible to efficiently make the game ball enter the second grand prize opening 15, but after the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), it enters the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) and the unit The opening time of the second starting port 12 per hour becomes shorter, in detail, the opening time of the second starting port 12 related to the auxiliary game becomes 0.2 seconds, the normal figure fluctuation time becomes 30 seconds, and the winning judgment Since the probability of being determined to be a "win" is extremely low, 1%, it is possible to efficiently enter the game ball into the second grand prize opening 15.

In addition, even if the time saving state shifts to the normal game state while the second starting port 12 is open, the second starting port 12 related to the auxiliary game started before the game ball passes the specific area 16. Since the opening time is 3.0 seconds, the opening of the second starting port 12 continues until 3.0 seconds have passed from the start. Therefore, the opening time of the second starting port 12 for the auxiliary game is 0.2 seconds from the auxiliary game that starts first after the game ball passes the specific area 16.

In addition, in the small winning game, the time required to close the second prize opening 15 after opening for the first time is set to 2.5 seconds, and the time required to close after opening the second prize opening 15 for the second time. is set to 1.5 seconds. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, if the game ball enters the second large winning hole 15 and passes through the specific area 16 by opening the second large winning hole 15 for the first time in a small winning game, The number of times the second big prize opening 15 is opened is 1 during the period from when the second big prize opening 15 starts to be opened in earnest (small winning opening active period), and although the second opening is in between, the actual number of openings is 1. Since there is a closing period of the second big prize opening 15 which is as long as 4.0 seconds, when the game ball passes the specific area 16, the auxiliary game related to the time saving state is being executed and the second starting opening 12 is closed. Even if it has been opened, the opening of the second starting opening 12 will have ended by the time the full-scale opening of the second big prize opening 15 (small winning opening active period) starts. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of winnings of game balls into the second grand prize opening 15 in small winning games. Furthermore, in the small winning game, the opening of the second big winning hole 15 after the second closing of the second big winning hole 15 is performed 13 times, so in the small winning game, the game ball can be efficiently transferred to the second big winning hole. It is possible to win a prize in the big prize opening 15.

Furthermore, after the first opening of the second big prize opening 15 ends and before the full-scale opening of the second big prize opening 15 starts (small winning opening active period), the second big prize winning Since the opening 15 is performed, even if the game ball does not win when the second big prize opening 15 is opened the first time, the game ball can be placed in the second prize when the second big prize opening 15 is opened the second time. It is possible to win a prize in the prize opening 15. In this case, when the game ball that won the prize passes through the specific area 16 while the second big prize opening 15 is opened for the second time, the normal game state starts from that time. After the second big winning opening 15 is opened for the second time, the second big winning opening 15 is closed for a time longer than the small winning opening active period. Therefore, even if the auxiliary game in the time-saving state is started after the second big winning hole 15 is opened for the second time, it is possible to reduce the loss of winnings of game balls into the second big winning hole 15.

In this way, in the small winning game, the small winning opening passive period in which the opening of the second big winning opening 15 is passive takes place first, and the small winning opening active period in which the opening of the second big winning opening 15 is active takes place. will be done later. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of winnings when the game ball enters the second major winning hole 15. Furthermore, most of the game balls that enter the second big prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16, but for example, the average number of times the game ball passes through the specific area 16 when a small winning game is being played is If it is necessary to be equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, it is possible to reduce the loss of winnings of game balls into the second major winning hole 15, so it is possible to easily satisfy this condition.

Next, the game state to which the pachinko game machine PY1 newly transitions upon the end of the jackpot game, and the termination conditions related to each game state will be explained. In the first embodiment, the game state that is newly transitioned to when the jackpot game ends, and the ending conditions for each game state are the special symbols caused by the jackpot game, and the game when the special symbols are stopped and displayed. associated with the state.

The jackpot game is executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the small win symbol is stopped and displayed and the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16 in the small win game. be done. Therefore, even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16, the jackpot game will not be executed, so the direct trigger for the occurrence of the jackpot game is when the game ball passes through the specific area 16. However, since the opening of the second big prize opening 15 is based on the small winning game, the stop display of the small winning symbol is also included in the special symbols caused by the big winning game.

In addition, the fact that the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, and that the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed and the first jackpot game is executed may be referred to as "jackpot 1." Similarly, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, and jackpot symbol D are stopped and displayed, and jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, and jackpot symbol D are stopped and displayed for the second jackpot game, the third jackpot game, and the fourth jackpot. The execution of the game may also be referred to as "jackpot 2," "jackpot 3," or "jackpot 4." Furthermore, the game ball that won the second big prize opening 15 in the first small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol A passes through the specific area 16, and that the fifth big winning game is executed after the passage. is sometimes referred to as "Jackpot 5". Similarly, in the second small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol B, the game ball that won the second big winning opening 15 passes through the specific area 16, and after the passing, the sixth jackpot game is executed. This is sometimes referred to as "Jackpot 6".

FIG. 55(A) shows the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state (special symbol type), the gaming state to which the jackpot game that corresponds to the special symbol type shifts when the jackpot game ends, and the end related to the gaming state. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a gaming state setting table showing the relationship with conditions, and FIG. 55(B) shows the types of special symbols stopped and displayed in the time saving state (special symbol types) and the types corresponding to the special symbol types. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a gaming state setting table showing the relationship between the gaming state that changes upon the end of the jackpot game and the ending condition related to the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 55(A), when the types of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the normal game state are jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol D, and small win symbol A, the jackpot game (second Upon completion of the first jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, and fifth jackpot game), a time saving state (low probability high base gaming state) is entered. A termination condition is set for this time saving state. The end condition is that the special figure 2 variable display is executed 99 times. Therefore, in the time-saving state that transitions with the end of the jackpot game that is executed after the jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol D, and small win symbol A are stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the special time saving state is changed without the jackpot game being executed. The variable display shown in FIG. 2 can be continued until it is executed 99 times. In other words, the prescribed number of times in the time saving state (the prescribed number of time saving times) that is transferred to when the jackpot game that is executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol D, and the small winning symbol A in the normal game state is completed is 99 times. It is.

In addition, when the types of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the normal game state are jackpot symbols B and small winning symbols B, when the jackpot game (second jackpot game, sixth jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type ends, Accordingly, the game shifts to a time saving state (low probability, high base gaming state). A termination condition is set for this time saving state. The termination condition consists of the special figure 2 variable display being executed once. Therefore, in the time saving state that changes with the end of the jackpot game that is executed after the jackpot symbol B and the small win symbol B are stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display is performed without the jackpot game being executed. It can continue until it is executed once. That is, the prescribed number of times (time saving prescribed number of times) of the time saving state to which the game changes upon the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol B and the small winning symbol B in the normal game state is one.

Furthermore, if the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state is jackpot symbol C, when the jackpot game (third jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type ends, the normal gaming state (low probability low base (gaming state). No end conditions are set for this normal gaming state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the types of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the time saving state are jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, jackpot symbol D, small prize symbol A, and small prize symbol B. In other words, no matter which jackpot symbol or small win symbol the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the jackpot game (first jackpot game, second jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type , 3rd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game, 6th jackpot game), the game shifts to a time saving state (low probability high base gaming state). A termination condition is set for this time saving state. The end condition is that the special figure 2 variable display is executed 99 times. Therefore, in the time-saving state that transitions with the end of the jackpot game that is executed by stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol and the small-winning symbol in the time-saving state, the special figure 2 variable display is 99% without the jackpot game being executed. It can continue until it has been executed twice. That is, the prescribed number of times of the time saving state (the prescribed number of time saving times) to which the time saving state shifts upon the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol and the small winning symbol in the time saving state is 99 times.

In this way, when the jackpot symbol and the small prize symbol are stopped and displayed in the time saving state, regardless of the type of the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol, with the end of the jackpot game, the prescribed number of time saving times will be 99 times. It is now possible to shift to a time-saving state. However, as mentioned above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, after once transitioning to the time-saving state, until the special symbol variable display becomes executable in the normal gaming state, the stop display of jackpot symbols in the time-saving state or the small winning When the jackpot game is executed twice due to the stop display of the symbols, the limiter is activated and the state shifts to the normal game state with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, if the executed jackpot game is a limiter jackpot game, priority is given to the relationship between the special symbol type based on the game state setting table and the game state to be transitioned to when the jackpot game ends, and the forced The normal gaming state is set.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the time saving state may occur due to an occurrence trigger different from a jackpot. The occurrence trigger other than this jackpot is that the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times without a jackpot in the normal gaming state. Although this specific number of times can be set as appropriate, it is set to 800 times in the first embodiment.

In the normal game state, when the special pattern variable display is executed a specific number of times, when the special pattern variable display related to the specific number of times ends (the losing pattern that has been stopped and displayed is determined), the time saving state is entered. In the following, the trigger for the occurrence of the time-saving state, ``the special pattern variable display being executed a specific number of times without hitting the jackpot in the normal gaming mode'', is referred to as ``reaching the ceiling'', and the ``specific number of times'' is referred to as the ``ceiling''. It is also called.

Further, the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling can continue until the special figure 2 variable display is executed 99 times without hitting the jackpot. That is, the prescribed number of times of time saving related to the time saving state is 99 times. Therefore, regardless of the trigger of occurrence, the prescribed number of times in the time saving state is 99 times and 1 time. In the following, a time-saving state in which the prescribed number of time-savings is 99 times may be referred to as an "advantageous time-saving state", and a time-saving state in which the prescribed number of time-savings is 1 may be referred to as a "disadvantageous time-saving state".

Next, the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing the main game flow executed in the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the normal gaming state (low probability low base gaming state) is set as the gaming state, and the normal performance mode indicating the normal gaming state is set as the performance mode. Ru. In the pachinko game machine PY1, the game progresses in this normal game state, and the situation in which the performance in the normal performance mode is executed in the normal game state becomes the starting point of the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1.

In the normal game state, which is a non-time-saving state, the game is mainly played in which a game ball is launched with a left-handed hit to win a prize into the first starting slot 11, and the player aims to win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery based on the prize. . When the special figure 1 lottery is executed, the special figure 1 variable display is executed. If you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 variable display, but the jackpot symbols related to the special symbol 1 include jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C. .

Here, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol A is performed (in the case of jackpot 1), the first jackpot game is executed ("1" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). In this case, there is a high possibility that three jackpot games will be executed consecutively including the first jackpot game (three jackpot games will not be executed consecutively). There is a high probability that a total of 24 round games will be played. The reason for this will be explained below.

When the stop display of the jackpot symbol A is performed in the normal game state (when the jackpot is 1), with the end of the first jackpot game, the prescribed number of time reductions becomes 99 times (advantageous time reduction state), and the time reduction The mode becomes production mode (circled "4" in FIG. 56).

Here, it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 12 by firing the game ball by hitting the right hand, and it is possible to win the prize in the first starting port 11 by continuing to fire the game ball by hitting the left in the normal gaming state. Also, in the time-saving state, it is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball by right-handed hitting and make it enter the second starting hole 12, and when a jackpot is hit, the prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game are From the viewpoint of the number of players and the gaming state that will be transferred after the jackpot game, the special chart 2 lottery is likely to have a more advantageous result for the player than the special chart 1 lottery (Fig. 50 (A), Fig. 50 (B), Fig. 50(C), FIG. 51, FIG. 55)) Therefore, in the time-saving state, the game aims to win a prize in the second starting slot 12, win a small prize in the special drawing 2 lottery based on the prize, and win a big prize. is mainly carried out.

Here, the probability that it will be determined as a "small hit" in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 2 lottery in the time saving state is 80/319 (≒ 1/4), and the probability that it will be determined as a "big hit" is 1/4. 319, so from the relationship between the stipulated number of time savings related to the advantageous time saving state "99 times" and the denominator "approximately 4" when the probability of being judged as a "small hit" in the jackpot judgment is expressed as a fraction, the advantageous time saving state is In this state, there is a high possibility of winning a small prize (it is highly likely that you will win a small prize). The small winning symbols related to special drawing 2 include small winning symbols A and B, but no matter which of the small winning symbols is stopped and displayed, a small winning game with the same control content is executed. be done.

The pachinko game machine PY1 is basically configured in such a way that if you continue to fire the game ball with a right hit in a small winning game, the game ball can pass through the specific area 16 (unless there is an extreme situation). There is. When the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a fifth jackpot game or a sixth jackpot game consisting of the same control content is executed in accordance with the end of the small winning game (" 5”). Then, with the end of the fifth jackpot game or the sixth jackpot game, the time saving prescribed number of times becomes 99 (advantageous time saving state) again, and the time saving production mode is entered (encircled in FIG. 56). 6).

Even in the advantageous time-saving state again, the prescribed number of time-savings is 99 times, and the probability of being judged as a "small hit" in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 2 lottery is 80/319 (≒ 1/4), so it is a "jackpot". The probability of determining this is 1/319, so in an advantageous time saving state, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that you will win a small win, and the 5th jackpot game or the 6th jackpot game will be executed ( (“5” circled in FIG. 56).

Here, as described above, in the pachinko game machine PY1, the number of times a player can execute a jackpot game by winning a jackpot or winning a small jackpot in a continuous time-saving state is limited to two. Then, when a jackpot game based on a jackpot win and a small win win in the second time-saving state is executed (a jackpot is won in the second time-saving state), the limiter is activated and is forced as the jackpot game ends. The game will then return to the normal gaming state.

In this way, after the first jackpot game including 4 round games is executed, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the 5th jackpot game including 10 round games or the 6th jackpot game will be integrally executed. The game is executed twice consecutively, and the normal game state is entered. Therefore, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol A is executed in the normal game state, a total of 24 round games will be executed over three jackpot games with a high probability (almost certainly). Below, three integral and consecutive jackpot games (one first jackpot game and two fifth jackpot games, or a sixth jackpot game) based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol A in this normal gaming state. is treated as one jackpot game and is referred to as the "first set jackpot".

In addition, when the second 5th jackpot game and the 6th jackpot game, in other words, the last jackpot game (limiter jackpot game) related to the 1st set jackpot, are completed, the normal gaming state is entered, but the pachinko game machine PY1 Since the upper limit of the number of reserved special figures 2 is "4", immediately after the limiter jackpot game, the special figure 2 variable display will be executed up to four times in the normal game state.

In addition, since the pachinko game machine PY1 is configured so that if you continue to fire the game ball with the right hand, you can easily win the second starting hole 12, so the number of reserved special drawings 2 immediately before the limiter jackpot game starts is It is assumed that the upper limit (4) has been accumulated and that the special figure 2 variable display will be executed 4 times in the normal game state immediately after the limiter jackpot game.

In addition, below, when the normal game state is entered after the end of the limiter jackpot game, the special drawing 2 reservation remaining at the time of transition to the normal game state will be referred to as "remaining reservation". If there are any remaining reservations at the end of the limiter jackpot game, when the limiter jackpot game ends and the normal gaming state is entered, the production mode will become a special mode, and the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining reservations will be displayed. The special figure variation performance corresponding to is performed in the special mode ("7" enclosed in a circle in FIG. 56). The contents of the special mode will be described later.

If all the jackpot judgments based on the remaining balance in the normal gaming state result in a loss, the normal production mode will be activated in response to the end of the last special figure 2 variable display in the normal gaming state (encircled in a circle in Fig. 56 ``16''). At this point, there is no special figure 2 pending and the game is in the normal gaming state, so by firing the game ball with the left hand again, it will enter the first starting slot 11 and win the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery based on the winning. A game will be played aiming at .

Here, the probability of being judged as a "small hit" in the jackpot judgment related to the special drawing 2 lottery in the normal gaming state is 80/319 (≒ 1/4), so if there are 4 remaining reservations, it is about 68 There is a probability of winning a small prize with a probability of %. Therefore, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is 4 even though the state is in the normal gaming state, the possibility of winning the small winning is greater than the possibility of not winning the small winning, considering the total number of remaining reservations. is higher, so the player can expect a jackpot.

If there is a small hit in the jackpot judgment based on the remaining balance in the normal gaming state, a jackpot game will be executed after the small winning game, but as mentioned above, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state, The specified number of time-saving times related to the time-saving state after the jackpot game differs depending on the type of winning symbol.

In the normal game state, when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed and a jackpot is achieved (“10” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), an advantageous time-saving state and a time-saving performance mode are entered according to the end of the fifth jackpot game. Therefore, the flow of the game after this is the same as after the first jackpot game is executed based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol A in the normal game state ("11" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). Therefore, there is a high possibility that a total of two fifth jackpot games or sixth jackpot games will be executed after this (“5” → “6” → “5” circled in FIG. 56). Then, when the second jackpot game is executed, the limiter is activated, and after the second fifth jackpot game or sixth jackpot game, the normal game state is entered (the "7" enclosed in a circle in FIG. ”). In addition, when the fifth jackpot game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol in the advantageous time-saving state or the advantageous time-saving state occurs in response to the end of the sixth jackpot game, the production mode becomes the time-saving production mode, and the advantageous time-saving state In this case, the performance in the time-saving performance mode (in particular, the special figure variation performance) is executed.

In this way, if the stop display of the small winning symbol A is executed while the remaining reserve has been exhausted in the normal gaming state, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the fifth stop display based on the stopping display of the small winning symbol A will be executed. Three jackpot games including the jackpot game (one fifth jackpot game and two fifth jackpot games, or the sixth jackpot game) are executed integrally and consecutively, and the three jackpot games A total of 30 round games are executed. In the following, the three consecutive jackpot games based on the stop display of the small winning symbols A in this normal gaming state will be treated as one jackpot game and will be referred to as a "second set jackpot".

On the other hand, if the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed in the normal game state and there is a jackpot (“12” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), a disadvantageous time-saving state is entered according to the end of the sixth jackpot game. Here, the probability that it will be determined as a "small hit" in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 2 lottery in the disadvantageous time-saving state is 80/319 (≒ 1/4), and the probability that it will be determined as a "loss" is: 238/319, so in this one jackpot determination, there is a higher possibility that it will be determined as a "loss" than a "small win".

However, the special map 2 variable display in the time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) where the prescribed number of time savings is 1 time is positioned as a period for accumulating the special map 2 reservation up to the upper limit, and the special map 2 variable display is performed. By continuing to fire the game ball by hitting right while playing, it is possible to accumulate the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit. Note that when the sixth jackpot game ends and the time becomes disadvantageous, the performance mode becomes the charge mode ("13" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). The contents of the charge mode will be described later.

Then, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed in the unfavorable time saving state and one special symbol 2 variable display in the charge mode, the time saving state shifts to the normal gaming state according to the stopped display, but in this case also, the limiter Just like immediately after the jackpot game, the special figure 2 variable display will be executed up to four times in the normal game state, and the special mode will be activated ("9" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). . The flow of the game after this is the same as after the end of the limiter jackpot game. Therefore, when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display in the normal gaming state, the second set jackpot is performed from there. On the other hand, when the small winning pattern B is stopped and displayed in the special pattern 2 variable display in the normal game state, the sixth jackpot game is executed, then the state shifts to the disadvantageous time saving state and becomes the charge mode, and the special pattern 2 is put on hold again. will be accumulated up to the upper limit.

In addition, in the following, when the regular gaming state is entered after the end of the time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) where the prescribed number of time saving times is 1, the special drawing 2 pending remaining at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is also referred to as "remaining pending". It is called.

In addition, when the small winning pattern A stops displaying and hits the jackpot in the unfavorable time saving state and the special pattern 2 variable display once in the charge mode ("14" surrounded by a circle in Fig. 56), the fifth jackpot game is executed. As a result, the system enters an advantageous time-saving state and enters a time-saving performance mode ("11" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56). As mentioned above, when an advantageous gaming state is reached, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the fifth jackpot game or the sixth jackpot game will be executed (the circled "5" in FIG. 56). Since the previous fifth jackpot game is executed based on the small win in the time saving state, when the jackpot is won or the small win is won in the advantageous time saving state and the jackpot game is executed, the limiter is activated. After the jackpot game, the game enters the normal game state and also enters the special mode (circled "7" in FIG. 56).

Therefore, when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed in the disadvantageous time saving state and in the charge mode, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the fifth jackpot game or the sixth jackpot game will be executed twice, and the second jackpot game will be executed twice. A total of 20 round games are executed over the jackpot game.

In addition, when the small winning pattern B stops displaying and hits the jackpot in the disadvantageous time saving state and the special pattern 2 variable display once in the charge mode ("15" surrounded by a circle in Fig. 56), the 6th jackpot game is executed. After that, the system enters an advantageous time-saving state and enters a time-saving performance mode ("17" enclosed in a circle in FIG. 56). Therefore, after this, there is a high probability (almost certainly) of two 5th jackpot games or 6th jackpot, as in the case where the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed in the disadvantageous time saving state and charge mode. The game is executed, and a total of 20 round games are executed over the two jackpot games.

In this way, in the disadvantageous time-saving state and charge mode, the stop display of the small winning symbol A or the stop display of the small winning symbol B becomes an advantageous time-saving state, and when the time-saving production mode is entered, there is a high probability (approximately (Reliably) the fifth jackpot game or the sixth jackpot game is executed twice, and a total of 20 round games are executed over the two jackpot games. In the following, two integrated and consecutive jackpot games (two fifth jackpot games or a sixth jackpot game) based on the stop display of the small winning symbol A or the small winning symbol B in this disadvantageous time-saving state will be described. It is treated as one jackpot game and is referred to as a "third set jackpot." The flow of the game after the end of the limiter jackpot game related to the third set jackpot is the same as after the end of the limiter jackpot game related to the first set jackpot.

In addition, when the small winning pattern A or the small winning pattern B is stopped and displayed in the special pattern 2 variable display in the disadvantageous time saving state and the 3rd set jackpot is executed, the 5th jackpot game is executed before the 3rd set jackpot. , or the 6th jackpot game is also being executed, so three jackpot games (5th jackpot game, or 6th jackpot game → 3rd set jackpot) are actually being executed integrally and consecutively. become. However, in an unfavorable time saving situation, there is a higher possibility of losing than winning a small hit, and the third set of jackpots is not actively planned, so the integrated and continuous sixth jackpot game and the third set of jackpots are not actively planned. The three-set jackpot is not positioned as a series of unified jackpot games like the first set jackpot and the second set jackpot.

Next, the expected game flow after the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in the normal game state will be explained. In this case, the second jackpot game including eight round games is executed (“2” surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), and in accordance with the end of the second jackpot game, the prescribed number of time-saving games is reduced to one round. It becomes a time saving state (unfavorable time saving state) and also enters the same charging mode as described above (circled "8" in FIG. 56).

In that the disadvantageous time saving state has been entered, as described above, it is the same as after the stop display of the small winning symbol B is executed in the special symbol 2 variable display based on the remaining reservation in the normal gaming state. However, in this case, the game is not played in the time saving state before that, and it is assumed that there is no special drawing 2 pending. Therefore, the special figure 2 variable display in the time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) where the prescribed number of time-savings is 1 is also positioned as a period for accumulating the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. By continuing to fire the game ball by hitting right while playing, it is possible to accumulate the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit.

In addition, in the first embodiment, since the target of the prescribed number of times of time saving that constitutes the end condition of the time saving state is the special figure 2 variable display, there is special figure 1 pending at the start of the time saving state after the second jackpot game, and the said special figure is Even if the special figure 1 variable display based on the suspension in FIG. 1 is executed, the disadvantageous time saving state will not end.

In addition, if the disadvantageous time shortening state occurs due to the end of the second jackpot game, the small winning symbol will be displayed in the special drawing 2 variable display based on the remaining reservation in the normal game state, depending on whether or not there is special drawing 2 pending at that time. Although this is different from the case of the disadvantageous time saving state after the stop display in B is executed, the subsequent game flow is the same. Therefore, the possibility of winning a small win in the disadvantageous time saving state is lower than the possibility of losing, and the possibility of moving to the normal gaming state and special mode is high, but in the normal gaming state and special mode, the remaining balance The aim is to execute the stop display of the small winning pattern A or the small winning pattern B (small winning pattern) in the special figure 2 variable display based on the above.

Next, the expected game flow after the jackpot symbol C is stopped and displayed in the normal game state will be explained. In this case, a third jackpot game including eight round games is executed ("3" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), and upon completion of the third jackpot game, a normal game state is entered, and The normal performance mode is entered ("18" enclosed in a circle in FIG. 56). In other words, although the third jackpot game was executed, the gaming state advantageous to the player ended and the situation returned to the same as before the third jackpot game.

In addition, after reaching the ceiling in the normal gaming state ("19" surrounded by a circle in FIG. 56), the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state and the first jackpot game starts. The situation will be the same as after execution.

As mentioned above, after the first jackpot game is executed, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that the fifth jackpot game or the sixth jackpot game will be executed two times in total (circle in Figure 56). ("5" → "6" → "5"), all jackpot games are executed when a small win is won, so the limiter is activated when the second jackpot game is executed, and the second jackpot game is executed. Upon completion of the first jackpot game, the game enters the normal game state and also enters the special mode ("7" enclosed in a circle in FIG. 56). Therefore, when an advantageous gaming state occurs due to reaching the ceiling, there is a high probability (almost certainly) that two 5th jackpot games or 6th jackpot games will be executed, and a total of 20 A round game will be executed. In the following, two integrated and consecutive jackpot games based on reaching this ceiling (two fifth jackpot games or sixth jackpot games) will be treated as one jackpot game and will be referred to as "4th set jackpot". . The game flow after the fourth set of jackpots is the same as after the first set of jackpots.

In addition, in the advantageous time-saving state and time-saving performance mode, the disadvantageous time-saving state and charge mode, and the normal game state and special mode, it may be determined as a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 2 lottery. In this case, the jackpot symbol D will be determined in the jackpot symbol type determination, and the game will be played after the jackpot symbol D is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 2 variable display corresponding to the jackpot determination (after jackpot 4). The flow is the same as when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed in the same game state and performance mode and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (big hit 5).

In addition, as mentioned above, in the pachinko game machine PY1, a plurality of integrated and continuous jackpot games can be treated as one jackpot game, and such jackpot games include the first set jackpot, the second set jackpot, and the second set jackpot. There are jackpots, third set jackpots, and fourth set jackpots, which will be collectively referred to as "set jackpots" below.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination and the special figure variation pattern according to the first embodiment will be explained. The special figure variation pattern determination is performed based on the special figure variation pattern determination table. The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table) is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state and a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the advantageous time-saving state. It is divided into a figure fluctuation pattern determination table and a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in a disadvantageous time saving state.

In the following, the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state will be referred to as the "normal special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table", and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table used in the advantageous time saving state will be referred to as "the normal special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table". The special symbol variation pattern determination table used in a disadvantageous time-saving state is referred to as the "disadvantageous time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table." In addition, among the regular special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables, the one related to special figure 1 is referred to as the "normal special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table", and the one related to special figure 2 is referred to as the "normal special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table". to be called. Similarly, among the advantageous time-saving special pattern variation pattern determination tables, the one related to special figure 1 is referred to as the ``advantageous time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table,'' and the one related to special figure 2 is referred to as ``advantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern.'' Among the unfavorable time-saving special pattern variation pattern determination tables, the one related to special figure 1 is called the "disadvantageous time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table," and the one related to special figure 2 is called the "disadvantageous time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table." 2 variation pattern determination table.

In addition, the regular special figure 2 variable pattern determination table shows that the time saving state ends after the limiter jackpot game ends, or when the special figure 2 variable display is executed for the specified number of times in the time saving state. There are some things that are referenced from then until the special figure 2 variable display is performed three times, and other things. Hereinafter, the former will be referred to as the "special regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table", and the latter will be referred to as the "general regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table". Therefore, if there are 4 special figure 2 pending when transitioning to the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game or the end of the time saving state, regarding the special figure 2 variable display that will be executed last among the remaining pending, The general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table will be referred to.

FIG. 57(A) is an example of the configuration of the general regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 57(B) is an example of the configuration of the special regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Further, FIG. 58(A) is a configuration example of an advantageous time-saving special feature 1 variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 58(B) is a configuration example of an advantageous time-saving feature 2 variation pattern determination table. Furthermore, FIG. 59(A) is a configuration example of a disadvantageous time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 59(B) is a configuration example of a disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Note that the normal special figure 1 variation pattern determination table has the same configuration as the non-time saving state part of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in FIG. 11 in the basic embodiment. Therefore, illustration of the normal special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is omitted.

Next, before explaining the special symbol fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the pachinko game machine PY1, the performances that can be executed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing special performances and charging performances. Special effects are executed in special mode, and charge effects are executed in charge mode.

In addition, both special effects and charge effects are executed based on the special pattern variation pattern judgment results, in other words, the jackpot judgment results, and support variable display of special figures according to the special pattern variation pattern judgment results (jackpot judgment results). and executed. The special performance and the charge performance constitute a special symbol variation performance, and finally, the jackpot determination result is notified based on the content of the performance.

The special effects include a first special effect and a second special effect. The first special effect is executed until the third special figure 2 variable display is executed after entering the special mode, and the second special effect is executed at the fourth special figure 2 variable display after entering the special mode. be done. Therefore, if there is no special figure 2 pending at the time when the third special figure 2 variable display ends after entering the special mode, the second special effect will not be executed.

Furthermore, although the details of the first special performance will be described later, in the first special performance, a background image dedicated to the first special performance composed of a moving image (animation) is displayed on the entire display section 50a. The content of the video related to this background image consists of a one-time at-bat confrontation in baseball. The first special performances include a long first special performance with the longest performance time, a short first special performance with the relatively shortest performance time, and a first special performance with a long performance time. There is a medium-time first special performance that is shorter than the short-time first special performance and longer than the short-time first special performance. As described later, the performance time related to the long-time first special performance, the performance time related to the medium-time first special performance, and the performance time related to the short-time first special performance are associated with the special figure fluctuation time. .

The special figure 2 variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display during the period in which the first special effect can be executed in the special mode (the period from the transition to the normal gaming state until the third special figure 2 variable display is executed) is , is determined with reference to the special and regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 57(C), the special and regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table includes a special and regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table that is associated with "big hit" and a special and regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table that is associated with "small hit". There is a special and regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and a special and regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table that is associated with "loss".

Each special and normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is configured such that three types of special figure 2 variation patterns can be selected. In the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to jackpots, there are special figure variation patterns in which the first special effect is executed for a long time (long first special jackpot variation) and special figures in which the first special effect is executed in a medium time. A variation pattern (medium first special jackpot variation) and a special pattern variation pattern (short first special jackpot variation) in which the first special effect is executed for a short time can be selected. In the special regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to small hits, there is a special figure variation pattern in which the first special effect is executed for a long time (long first special small hit variation) and a medium time first special effect is executed. A special figure variation pattern (medium first special small win variation) and a special figure variation pattern in which the first special performance is executed for a short time (short first special small win variation) can be selected. In the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to losses, there are special figure variation patterns in which the first special effect is executed for a long time (long first special loss variation) and special figures in which the first special effect is executed in a medium time. A variation pattern (medium first special loss variation) and a special symbol variation pattern (short first special loss variation) in which the first special effect is executed for a short time can be selected. In this way, when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, the first long-time special performance, the first medium-time special performance, and the first short-time special performance can be selected. , No matter which type of first special performance is executed, there is a possibility that the stop display of the jackpot symbol and the stop display of the small win symbol will be executed. In other words, the first long-time special performance, the first medium-time special performance, and the first short-time special performance are performances that suggest that there is a possibility of a jackpot, and that there is a possibility of a small win. It is a suggestive performance.

In addition, in the special normal special jackpot 2 variation pattern determination table related to jackpots, the long 1st special jackpot variation is selected with an 85% probability, the medium 1st special jackpot variation is selected with a 10% probability, and the 1st special jackpot variation is selected with a 5% probability. The short first special jackpot variation is selected. In addition, in the special normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to small hits, the long 1st special small winning variation is selected with a 50% probability, the medium 1st special small winning variation is selected with a 35% probability, and the 15th special small winning variation is selected with a 35% probability. The short first special small winning variation is selected with a probability of %. Furthermore, in the special normal special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table related to losses, the long first special loss variation is selected with a 10% probability, the medium first special loss variation is selected with a 30% probability, and the probability is 60%. The short first special loss variation is selected. Therefore, the long-time first special performance is a performance that suggests that there is a higher possibility of becoming a jackpot than the medium-time first special performance and the short-time first special performance. It is a performance that suggests. Moreover, the medium-time first special performance is a performance that suggests that there is a higher possibility of a jackpot than the short-time first special performance, and is a performance that suggests that there is a higher possibility of a small win.

In addition, in the second special performance, a background image dedicated to the second special performance, which is composed of a moving image (animation) with predetermined content, is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Note that a description of the content of the second special performance will be omitted. The special figure 2 variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display during the period in which the second special effect can be executed in the special effect mode (the fourth special figure 2 variable display after transitioning to the normal gaming state) is the general normal special figure 2. Determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 57(B), the special regular special pattern 2 variation pattern judgment table includes a general regular special pattern 2 variation pattern judgment table associated with "big hit" and a general regular special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table associated with "small win". There is a general regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and a general regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with "loss".

Each general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is configured such that one type of special figure 2 variation pattern can be selected. In the general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the jackpot, a special figure variation pattern (second special jackpot variation) in which the second special performance is executed can be selected. In the general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the small hit, the special figure variation pattern (second special small hit variation) in which the second special performance is executed can be selected. In the general normal special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to loss, a special figure variation pattern (second special loss variation) in which the second special performance is executed can be selected. In this way, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss, the second special effect can be selected, so when the second special effect is executed, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, There is a possibility that the small winning symbol will be stopped and displayed. That is, the second special performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit, and a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of a small win.

Furthermore, in the charging performance, a background image dedicated to the charging performance, which is composed of a moving image (animation) with predetermined content, is displayed on the display section 50a. Note that a description of the content of the second special performance will be omitted. The special figure 2 variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display during the period in which charge performance can be performed in the charge mode (the first special figure 2 variable display after shifting to the disadvantageous time-saving state) is determined by the disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern. Determined by referring to the table. As shown in FIG. 58(B), the disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table includes the disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with "big hit" and the unfavorable time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with "small hit". There is a disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and a disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with "loss".

Each disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is configured such that one type of special figure 2 variation pattern can be selected. In the unfavorable time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to jackpot, a special figure variation pattern (charge jackpot variation) in which charge performance is executed can be selected. In the disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to a small hit, a special figure variation pattern (charge small hit variation) in which a charge performance is executed can be selected. In the disadvantageous time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to losing, it is possible to select a special figure variation pattern (charge loss variation) in which charge performance is executed. In this way, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss, the charge effect can be selected, so when the charge effect is executed, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small win symbol is displayed. A stop display may be executed. That is, the charging performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit, and a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of a small win.

As mentioned above, the charge mode is a performance mode corresponding to the time saving state where the specified number of time saving times is one, and in this one special figure 2 variable display, it is not possible to let the player accumulate special figure 2 reservations. That's what I'm aiming for. Therefore, in order to secure enough time to accumulate up to 4 special figure 2 reservations in the special figure 2 variable display, special figure variation time related to charge jackpot variation, special figure variation time related to charge small hit variation, The special symbol fluctuation time related to charge loss fluctuation is both set to 40 seconds.

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs greatly from the basic embodiment, and processing that was not performed in the basic embodiment will be described. Note that the processing content described below is an example, and the processing content is not limited thereto.

First, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. FIG. 60 shows a flowchart of the game control side timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the same steps as in the basic embodiment up to the special operation process (S106) in the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) described in the basic embodiment. . Then, after the special operation process (S106), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a specific area control process as step S107. Note that after the specific area control process (S107), other processes (S107) in the basic embodiment are performed as step S108.

In the specific area control process (S107), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a process of controlling the opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the small winning game, in other words, the operation of the distribution member 16k. As will be described later, when a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming control microcomputer 101 stores a small winning game specific area control table (see 53) corresponding to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed in a predetermined location in the gaming RAM 104. area and set the special operation status "6". Then, when the special operation status "6" is set, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the set small winning game specific area control in the specific area control process (S107) based on the start of the small winning game. Based on the table, opening and closing of the specific area 16 (operation of the distribution member 16k) is controlled so that the time chart of the small winning game shown in FIG. 54 is realized.

Next, the sensor detection process (S104) will be explained. However, the game control microcomputer 101 executes steps up to step S220 in the sensor detection process (S104) described in the basic embodiment in the same manner as in the basic embodiment. Therefore, the processing after step S220 will be explained. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the sensor detection process according to the first embodiment, and shows the portion after step S220.

In step S221, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a game ball has won in the first big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S225 if the game ball has not won in the first grand prize opening 14 (NO in S221), and if the game ball has won in the first grand prize opening 14 ( (YES in S221), it is determined whether the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter provided in the gaming RAM 104 is "11" or more (S222).

The big winning hole winning counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the first big winning hole 14 and the second big winning hole 15 in one round game of the jackpot game or the small winning game. It is assumed that the big winning opening prize counter is cleared by the game control microcomputer 101 when each round of the jackpot game ends or when the small winning game ends. In the first embodiment, the number of prizes allowed to be won in the first big prize opening 14 and the second big prize opening 15 in one round game and one small winning game (AT winning regulation number) is It is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 and step S226, which will be described later, are performed.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the process proceeds to step S225, and if the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not "11" or more, i.e. , if it is less than "11" (NO in S222), the counter value of the grand prize opening prize counter is incremented by "1" (S223), and the first grand prize opening is used to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player. A prize ball process is performed (S224), and the process proceeds to step S225. In addition, in the first big winning hole prize ball processing, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the number of prize balls (the first In the embodiment, "15") is added, and a command indicating that a prize has been won in the first major winning opening 14 (first major winning opening winning command) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

In step S225, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a game ball has won in the second big winning hole 15, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S229 if the game ball has not won in the second grand prize opening 15 (NO in S225), and if the game ball has won in the second grand prize opening 15 ( (YES in S225), it is determined whether the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter provided in the gaming RAM 104 is "11" or more (S226).

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S226), the process proceeds to step S229, and if the counter value of the big winning opening winning prize counter is not "11" or more, i.e. , if it is less than "11" (NO in S226), the counter value of the grand prize opening prize counter is incremented by "1" (S227), and the second grand prize opening is opened to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player. A prize ball process is performed (S228), and the process advances to step S229. In addition, in the second grand prize opening prize ball processing, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the number of prize balls (the first In the embodiment, "15") is added, and a command indicating that a prize has been won in the first major prize opening 14 (second major prize opening winning command) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.
to add.

In step S229, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 16, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 16a. If the game ball has not passed through the specific area 16 (NO in S229), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S232, and if the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (YES in S229), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S232. A specific area passing flag indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area 16 is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104 (S230), and a specific area passing command indicating that the gaming ball has passed the specific area 16 is set in the gaming RAM 104. It is set in the output buffer (S231), and the process advances to step S232.

In step S232, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game is currently in a time saving state, that is, whether the time saving flag is turned on. The game control microcomputer 101 finishes the sensor detection process when the game ball is not in a time saving state (NO in S232), and when it is in a time saving state (YES in S232), turns off the time saving flag and returns to the gaming state. Reset, in other words, shift from the time saving state to the normal gaming state (S233), set a gaming state designation command indicating the normal gaming state in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 (S234), and end the sensor detection process. In this way, in response to the game ball passing through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the time saving state changes to the normal game state. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the game state designation command set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 to the production control board 120 in the output process of step S101.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs the first big prize opening winning command, the second big winning opening winning command, and the specific area passing command set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to the production control board in the output process of step S101. 120. The production control board 120 (production control microcomputer 121) receives the first grand prize opening winning command, the second grand prize opening winning command, and the specific area passage command, thereby controlling the winning to the first grand prize opening 14, It is recognized that a prize has been entered into the second grand prize opening 15 and that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16.

Next, special operation processing according to the first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 62 shows a flowchart of special operation processing according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, in the special operation process according to the first embodiment, the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, the first big winning device 14D, the second big winning device 15D, and the specific area device Processing related to 16D is divided into six statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" is assigned to each of these statuses.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Process (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "6", the small winning game is Control processing (S1507) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The small winning game control process (S1507) is a process performed in the small winning game. As will be described later, when a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming control microcomputer 101 stores a small winning game large winning opening control table (see FIG. 52) corresponding to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed in the gaming RAM 104. , and set the special operation status to "6". Then, when the special operation status "6" is set, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the small win game control process (S1507) in FIG. The opening and closing of the second big prize opening 15 (operation of the second AT opening/closing member 15k) is controlled so that the time chart of the small winning game shown in the figure is realized.

Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 16, that is, whether or not the specific area passing flag is turned on, when the small winning game ends in the small winning game control process. judge. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16, in order to execute a jackpot game based on the passage to the specific area 16, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the same operation as when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. , performs steps S1767 to S1770 in special symbol confirmation processing to be described later, and turns off the specific area passing flag. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game ball has not passed through the specific area 16, it changes the "special operation status" to "1" in order to enable the next special figure variable display.

Furthermore, the game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. As will be described later, when a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and when a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game state at that time, the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot. A game state setting table (see FIG. 55) corresponding to the type of symbol is set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state based on the set game state setting table.

When the game control microcomputer 101 performs control in the time saving state after the jackpot game, it turns on the time saving flag in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to shift to the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, the game control microcomputer 101 also sets the duration in order to define the duration of the time saving state. In the first embodiment, the condition for ending the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display, so the game control microcomputer 101 sets the specified time saving number in the remaining time saving counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game in the normal gaming state after the jackpot game, it shifts to the normal gaming state by not turning on the time saving flag in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104.

However, if the jackpot game related to the game state setting process corresponds to a limiter jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 101 may The time-saving flag is not turned on in the time-saving flag area of the RAM 104 for gaming, and the game state is shifted to a normal game state. Note that the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game corresponds to a limiter jackpot game when a limiter flag, which will be described later, is turned on. Moreover, in this case, the game control microcomputer 101 finally turns off the limiter flag.

In addition, in the game state setting process (S1506), the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the time saving state to be set is an advantageous time saving state or a disadvantageous time saving state, or in other words, whether the prescribed number of time saving times in the time saving state is 99. Whether it is one time or not is set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a flag indicating that the time-saving state to which the time-saving state to be transferred from now on is an advantageous time-saving state to be an advantageous time-saving state; A flag indicating the current state is set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. This is because even in the same time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination table (conditions for determining the special figure variation pattern) referred to in the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state are different.

Furthermore, in the game state setting process (S1506), the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game, but here, it is not set to a high probability state as in the basic embodiment. Therefore, a specific number of times related to the ceiling (in the first embodiment, 800 times) is set in a ceiling remaining number of times counter, which will be described later. Through this process, the remaining number of executions of the special figure variable display until the ceiling is reached is counted.

Next, the special figure 2 determination process according to the first embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special figure 2 determination process according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 63. As shown in FIG. 63, the game control microcomputer 101 first performs a second jackpot determination in step S1620 in the special figure 2 determination process. In the second jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special symbol random number stored in the special symbol 2 reservation storage section 105b, and collates it with the second jackpot determination table. , determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot in step S1621. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a jackpot, it proceeds to step S1626, and if it determines that it is a jackpot, it selects the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special drawing 2 in step S1622, and in step S1623, it selects the jackpot symbol type determination table. Make a judgment.

In jackpot symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored jackpot symbol type random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, and collates it with the jackpot symbol type determination table. Then, it is determined which jackpot symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the jackpot symbol type determination, in step S1624 it sets a symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1625, it sets the symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type that is the determination result. A symbol designation command indicating a jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is finished, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a small win in step S1626. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1631, and if it determines that it is a small hit, it selects the small winning symbol type determination table related to special drawing 2 in step S1627, and in step S1628, Determine the type of small winning symbol.

In the small winning symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored small winning symbol random number among the small winning symbol type random numbers stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, and determines the small winning symbol type. It is checked against the table to determine which small winning symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the small winning symbol type determination, in step S1629, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the small winning symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1630, A symbol designation command indicating the small winning symbol type which is the determination result is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination processing is completed, and the processing is returned to the special symbol standby processing.

In step S1631, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a symbol type flag indicating the losing symbol type (the losing symbol of special figure 2) in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1632, sets the symbol type flag indicating the losing symbol type (the losing symbol of special figure 2). A symbol designation command indicating a losing symbol) is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG.

In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol in step S1751, that is, the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703. It is determined whether the time has elapsed (special operation counter=0). If the special symbol confirmation time has not elapsed, the game control microcomputer 101 ends the special symbol confirmation process, and if the special symbol confirmation time has elapsed, in step S1752, the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. Determine whether or not. If it is a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1767, and if it is not a jackpot symbol, it determines in step S1752 whether or not it is in a time-saving state (the time-saving flag is ON).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state, the process proceeds to step S1758, and if it is in the time-saving state, it is determined in step S1754 whether or not the stopped and displayed special figure is the special figure 2. If it is not the special figure 2, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1758, and if it is in the time saving state, in step S1755, it subtracts "1" from the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times), and in step S1756. , it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter (time saving remaining number of times) is "0".

If the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0", the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1758, and if the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0", In step S1757, the time saving flag is turned OFF to set the normal gaming state, and the process proceeds to step S1758.

In step S1758, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol. If it is a small winning symbol, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1771, and if it is not a small winning symbol, it is determined in step S1759 whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining number counter is greater than "0". The value of the ceiling remaining number counter counts the remaining number of times (ceiling remaining number of times) that the special figure variable display can be executed until the ceiling is reached, and is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104.

If the remaining ceiling count is not greater than "0", the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1765, and if the remaining ceiling count is greater than "0", it subtracts "1" from the value of the remaining ceiling count counter in step S1760. Then, in step S1761, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling remaining number counter is "0".

If the remaining number of ceilings is not "0", the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1765, and if the remaining number of ceilings is "0", in step S1762, it turns on the time saving flag and sets the time saving flag based on reaching the ceiling. By setting the specified number of time saving times "99" related to the end condition of the time saving state to which the state is to be transferred, in the remaining time saving number counter, the time saving state (advantageous time saving state) where the prescribed number of time saving times is 99 is made.

Next, in step S1763, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a command indicating that the ceiling has been reached (ceiling specification command) in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1764, sets "2" to the limiter activation counter. is set, and the process advances to step S1765. The limiter activation counter indicates the number of times the jackpot game can be executed before the limiter is activated, and is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104.

In step S1765, the gaming control microcomputer 101 checks whether the time saving flag is ON/OFF, sets a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1766, sets the special operation status. is changed to "1" and the special symbol confirmation process is ended.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 performs jackpot game preparation processing in step S1767. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the specific condition that the game is currently in the normal game state and the counter value of the limiter activation counter is "0" is satisfied. . When the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the specific condition is met, it sets a specific condition fulfillment flag indicating that the specific condition is met in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. The establishment of the specific condition means that a jackpot game based on the stop display of jackpot symbols or the stop display of small win symbols in the normal gaming state is started, and a time saving state is set according to the end of the jackpot game. This is to count the number of times the jackpot game can be executed until the limiter is activated.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the counter value of the limiter activation counter is "1" or more. Here, if the counter value of the limiter activation counter is "1" or more, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the counter value of the limiter activation counter so that the counter value of the limiter activation counter becomes "0". Determine whether it has become. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the counter value of the limiter activation counter has become "0," the jackpot game that will start from now on corresponds to a limiter jackpot game, so it sets a limiter flag indicating that the limiter has been activated for the game. A predetermined area of the RAM 104 is turned on.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on/off the limiter flag (whether or not the jackpot game to be started is a limiter jackpot game), the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed, or the type of the jackpot symbol. A jackpot game control table corresponding to the type is set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state setting table in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 according to the current game state and the type of the small winning symbol or the type of the jackpot symbol that is being stopped and displayed.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 resets the value of the ceiling remaining number of times counter in step S1768, and in step S1769, turns off the time saving flag and sets the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter to "0", thereby changing the gaming state. is reset (shifted to the normal gaming state), the special operation status is changed to "4" in step S1770, and the special symbol confirmation process is ended.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a small winning game preparation process in step S1771, changes the special operation status to "6" in step S1772, and ends the special symbol confirmation process.

In addition, in the small winning game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the small winning game control table (small winning game large winning opening control table, and small winning game specific area control table) according to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed. ) is set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 determines a predetermined opening time (from the start of the small winning game to the start of the first opening of the second big winning hole 15) based on the small winning game large winning hole control table. time) in the special operation timer.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on a small winning opening flag in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, which indicates that a small winning game is opening according to the type of the small winning symbol that is being stopped and displayed. , an opening command indicating the type of the small winning symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in accordance with the type of the small winning symbol. The opening command corresponding to the type of the small winning symbol indicates that a small winning game (opening of the small winning game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed small winning symbol is started.

In addition, in the gaming state setting process (S1506), if the specific condition fulfillment flag is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets the limiter activation counter to "2" when transitioning to the time saving state, and sets the specific condition Turn off the establishment flag. In order to count the remaining number of executions of the jackpot game until the limiter is activated, since the time saving state is entered with the end of the jackpot game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol and the stop display of the jackpot symbol in the normal gaming state. It is.

Next, the performance that the pachinko game machine PY1 can perform in the jackpot game will be explained. The performance control microcomputer 121 executes a prize ball number performance related to the prize ball number on the display section 50a when a jackpot game is being executed. The prize pitch number presentation is configured by displaying a prize pitch number image G30 representing information regarding the prize pitch number. The prize ball number image G30 is the expected prize ball number image G31 which numerically represents the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the jackpot game (in other words, the number of prize balls to be acquired) (planned prize ball number to be acquired), and the prize ball number image G31 that is actually obtained in the jackpot game. An acquired prize pitch number image G32 representing the number of awarded prize pitches (acquired award pitch number) as a number, and is a fraction with the expected award pitch number image G31 as the denominator and the acquired prize pitch number image G32 as the numerator. It is configured.

The expected prize ball number image G31 represents the number of prize balls expected to be obtained in the jackpot game, but if the jackpot game constitutes a set jackpot, it represents the number of prize balls scheduled to be obtained in the entire set jackpot. Similarly, the acquired prize ball number image G32 represents the number of prize balls acquired through the set jackpot.

As mentioned above, the numbers of the jackpot games and round games that constitute the first set jackpot, the second set jackpot, the third set jackpot, and the fourth set jackpot are different. Specifically, the first set jackpot consists of one first jackpot game and two fifth jackpot games or a sixth jackpot game, and includes 24 round games. The second set jackpot consists of three fifth jackpot games or a sixth jackpot game, and includes 30 round games. The third set jackpot consists of one fifth jackpot game and one fifth jackpot game or one sixth jackpot game, and includes 20 round games. The fourth set jackpot consists of two fifth jackpot games or a sixth jackpot game, and includes 20 round games. Therefore, depending on the type of set jackpot, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that can be obtained based on winning in the first big winning hole 14 differs.

The stipulated number of AT prizes for each round game is 10, and the number of prize balls based on winning in the first big prize opening 14 is 15, so in the first set of jackpots, the total number of prizes is 3,600. In the second set of jackpots, a total of 4,500 prize balls can be won, in the third set of jackpots, a total of 3,000 prize balls can be won, and in the fourth set of jackpots, a total of 4,500 prize balls can be won. It is possible to win 3000 prize balls.

Therefore, when the jackpot game related to the first set jackpot is being executed, "3600" is displayed as the expected prize ball number image G31, and when the jackpot game related to the second set jackpot is being executed, the expected prize "4500" is displayed as the number of balls image G31, and when a jackpot game related to the third set jackpot is being executed, "3000" is displayed as the expected prize ball number image G31, and a jackpot game related to the fourth set jackpot is being executed. When is being executed, "3000" is displayed as the expected prize pitch number image G31.

In addition, in the jackpot game related to each set jackpot, the acquired prize ball number image G32 represents the number of prize balls actually acquired through the set jackpot, so that the second and subsequent jackpot games related to each set jackpot are started. At this time, the number of prize balls actually acquired by the end of the previous jackpot game is taken over and displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32. Therefore, in each round game of each jackpot game, if game balls can be entered into the first jackpot 14 until the prescribed number of AT prizes is reached, the second and subsequent jackpot games related to each set jackpot will be started. When the game is completed, the number of prize balls expected to be acquired by the end of the previous jackpot game is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32.

For example, in the case of the first set of jackpots, "600" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32 when the second jackpot game is started, and when the third jackpot game is started, "600" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32. "2100" is displayed as the number image G32. In the case of the second set jackpot, "1500" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32 when the second jackpot game is started, and the acquired prize ball number image is displayed when the third jackpot game is started. "3000" is displayed as G32. In the case of the third set jackpot, "1500" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32 when the second jackpot game is started. In the case of the fourth set jackpot, "1500" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32 when the second jackpot game is started.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the prize ball number performance is continuously executed from the start of the opening of the jackpot game until the end of the last round game. However, the execution period of the prize pitch presentation may be changed as appropriate. For example, the prize pitch presentation may not be performed during the opening, but may be performed during the round game. Furthermore, the prize ball count presentation may also be performed at the ending. Alternatively, in addition to during the jackpot game, the prize ball number performance may be executed also in a time-shortened state between jackpot games related to set jackpots.

Further, as mentioned above, in various set jackpots, the ending time for the limiter jackpot game is set to 10 seconds. Then, at the ending of the limiter jackpot game, a set jackpot ending effect indicating that the set jackpot ends is executed. On the other hand, the non-limiter time related to the non-limiter jackpot game is set to 0 seconds. In other words, a non-limiter jackpot game does not have an ending after the round game ends, and if there is a special figure pending, the special figure variable display may be executed when the last round game ends. Therefore, in a non-limiter jackpot game, a set jackpot ending performance or a performance that suggests that the jackpot game ends is not executed.

In the set jackpot ending production, an image G42 (CI image G42) representing the CI (corporate identity) of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine PY1, and an image G33 (total number of balls won) representing the number of prize balls won in the set jackpot Image G33) is displayed.

In addition, when transitioning to the time-saving state and time-saving performance mode in response to the end of a non-limiter jackpot game related to a set jackpot, immediately after the end of the jackpot game, a performance indicating that the time-saving performance mode will be entered from now on (time-saving performance mode) The start suggestion effect) is executed. The time-saving performance mode start suggestion performance is configured by displaying an image G41 (time-saving performance mode start suggestion image G41) that suggests entering the time-saving performance mode.

In addition, in the last round game of the jackpot game that is executed first in the non-limiter jackpot game related to the set jackpot, the game will be played in an advantageous time-saving state from now on, and the number of game balls in possession will be difficult to decrease. A performance is performed to call attention to taking out the prepaid card from the card unit CU (a performance calling attention to forgetting to remove the card). The forget-to-remove card reminder effect is configured by displaying an image G40 (forget-to-remove card reminder image G40) to remind the user to take out the prepaid card from the card unit CU. However, in a non-limiter jackpot game, the warning effect for forgetting to pull out a card is performed in a relatively inconspicuous manner, specifically, in a small size relative to the entire screen of the display unit 50a, at a position closer to the edge of the display unit 50a. be done. This is because a round performance is being performed.

In addition, in both limiter jackpot games and non-limiter jackpot games, an opening effect that suggests that each jackpot game will start is executed at the opening, and a round game suggests that a round game is being executed. A round performance will be executed.

Even in jackpot games that do not constitute a set jackpot (second jackpot game, third jackpot game), an opening effect suggesting that each jackpot game will start is executed at the opening, and a round game is executed during the round game. In addition to executing a round effect suggesting that the jackpot game is over, an ending effect indicating that the jackpot game ends is executed at the ending.

In addition, at the ending of the second jackpot game, after the ending performance, a performance that suggests that the game will enter the challenge mode (challenge mode start suggestion performance) is performed. The challenge mode start suggestion effect is composed of displaying an image that suggests entering the challenge mode (challenge mode start suggestion image).

Here, specific examples of performances related to the jackpot game, such as the prize ball count performance, the set jackpot ending performance, the forget-to-remove card performance, the time-saving performance mode start suggestion performance, will be explained using FIGS. 65 to 74. In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 74 shown below, it is assumed that the prescribed number of AT winning balls are won in the first grand prize opening 14 in each round game. Further, it is assumed that in each non-limiter jackpot game and the second jackpot game, the game ball passes through the specific area 16 and enters an advantageous time-saving state according to the end of the jackpot game.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing specific examples of various performances related to the first jackpot game (non-limiter jackpot game) related to the first set jackpot, and FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example of various performances related to the last jackpot game (limiter jackpot game) related to the first set jackpot. In addition, FIG. 68 is a diagram showing specific examples of various performances related to the first jackpot game (non-limiter jackpot game) related to the second set jackpot, and FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example of various performances related to the last jackpot game (limiter jackpot game) related to the second set jackpot. Furthermore, FIG. 71 is a diagram showing specific examples of various performances related to the first jackpot game (non-limiter jackpot game) related to the third set jackpot, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating specific examples of various effects related to games. Further, FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example of various effects related to the second jackpot game, and FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example of various effects related to the third jackpot game.

FIG. 65(A) shows the situation at the start of the first jackpot game (first jackpot game) related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 65(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize ball number image G30 is displayed. As mentioned above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first set jackpot is 3,600, so "3,600" is displayed as the expected number of prize balls to be obtained G31. Further, at this time, since no game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 in the first set jackpot, "0" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32.

FIG. 65(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the first jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 65(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed as a round effect on the display unit 50a. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the first set of jackpots, the number of prize balls that have been won in the first grand prize opening 14 is shown as the acquired prize ball number image G32. The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 65(C) shows the situation immediately before the end of the last (fourth) round game of the first jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 65(C), a round image G3 representing that a fourth round game is being executed is displayed as a round effect on the display unit 50a. In addition, in the first jackpot game (first jackpot game) in the first set of jackpots, it is possible to win a maximum of 600 prize balls, and since it is assumed as described above, the acquired prize balls number image As G32, "600" is displayed, which is the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game. Furthermore, the jackpot game is the first jackpot game related to the first set of jackpots, and in the last round game of the first jackpot game, a warning effect for forgetting to draw out a card is executed, so that the display section 50a does not display any cards. A forget-to-remove reminder image G40 is displayed.

FIG. 65(D) shows the situation immediately after the first jackpot game related to the first set jackpot ends, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the first jackpot game related to the first set jackpot ends. . When the non-limiter jackpot game related to the first set jackpot ends and becomes an advantageous time-saving state, the time-saving production mode start suggestion performance will be executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, and it is assumed as described above. As shown in FIG. 65(D), a time-saving effect mode start suggestion image G41 is displayed on the display section 50a. In addition, since the time-saving effect mode is entered, the time-saving background image G130 is displayed on the display section 50a.

FIG. 66(A) shows the situation at the start of the second jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 66(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. As described above, the acquired prize ball number image G32 related to the prize ball number performance in the set jackpot represents the number of prize balls acquired through the set jackpot. Then, in the first jackpot game of the first set of jackpots, 600 prize balls were won (see Figure 65(C)), and at this time, in the second jackpot game, the game balls entered the first jackpot. 14, so "600" is displayed as the acquired prize pitch number image G32.

FIG. 66(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the second jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 66(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed as a round effect on the display unit 50a. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the second jackpot game, the acquired prize ball number image G32 is changed from "600" immediately before to the first grand prize opening 14. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to the winning pitch of 14, is added.

FIG. 66(C) shows the situation immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the second jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 66(C), a round image G3 representing that a tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the second jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the first set of jackpots, it is possible to obtain a maximum of 1500 prize balls, and it is assumed as described above. As the acquired prize ball number image G32, "2100" is displayed together with the number of prize balls (600) that can be acquired in the first jackpot game.

FIG. 66(D) shows the situation immediately after the second jackpot game related to the first set jackpot ends, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the second jackpot game related to the first set jackpot ends. ing. In this case as well, the time-saving production mode start suggestion image G41 is displayed on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 66(D), in the same way as immediately after the first jackpot game related to the first set jackpot ends.

FIG. 67(A) shows the state at the start of the last (third) jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 67(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. The acquired prize ball number image G32 related to the prize ball number performance in the set jackpot represents the number of prize balls acquired through the set jackpot. Then, by the time the second jackpot game of the first set of jackpots ends, 2100 prize balls have been acquired (see Figure 66(C)), and at this time, the game ball has been won in the third jackpot game. Since no prize has been entered in the first grand prize opening 14, "2100" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32.

FIG. 67(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the third jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 67(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed as a round effect on the display unit 50a. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the third jackpot game, the acquired prize ball number image G32 is changed from "2100" immediately before to the first grand prize opening 14. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to the winning pitch of 14, is added.

FIG. 67(C) shows the situation immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the third jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 67(C), a round image G3 representing that a tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the third jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the first set of jackpots, it is possible to win a maximum of 1500 prize balls, and it is assumed as above, As the acquired prize ball number image G32, "3600" is displayed together with the number of prize balls (2100) that can be acquired by the end of the second jackpot game.

FIG. 67(D) shows the ending of the third (last) jackpot game related to the first set jackpot. The jackpot game is a limiter jackpot game, and at the ending of the limiter jackpot game, a set jackpot ending performance that suggests that the set jackpot ends is executed. As shown in FIG. 67(D), in the ending, a CI image G42 and a total acquisition number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls acquired in the first set jackpot are displayed as a set jackpot ending effect. ing. Although the performance time of the set jackpot ending performance can be set as appropriate, for example, the ending is executed from the time it starts until it ends.

FIG. 68(A) shows the situation at the start of the first jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 68(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize ball number image G30 is displayed. As mentioned above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the second set jackpot is 4500, so "4500" is displayed as the expected number of prize balls image G31. Further, at this time, since no game balls have entered the first big winning hole 14 in the second set jackpot, "0" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32.

FIG. 68(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first jackpot 14 in the first round game of the first jackpot game related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 68(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the second set of jackpots, the number of won prize balls image G32 related to the prize balls that entered the first grand prize opening 14 once. The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 68(C) shows the situation immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the first jackpot game related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 68(C), a round image G3 representing that a tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the first jackpot game (4th jackpot game to 6th jackpot game) in the second set of jackpots, it is possible to win a maximum of 1500 prize balls, and since it is assumed as described above, the acquisition "1500", which is the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, is displayed as the number of prize balls image G32. Further, since the jackpot game is the first jackpot game related to the second set jackpot, the forget-to-remove card reminder image G40 is displayed on the display section 50a, as in the case of the first set jackpot.

FIG. 68(D) shows the situation immediately after the first jackpot game related to the second set jackpot ends, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the first jackpot game related to the second set jackpot ends. . When the non-limiter jackpot game related to the second set jackpot ends and becomes an advantageous time-saving state, the time-saving production mode start suggestion performance is executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, and it is assumed as described above. As shown in FIG. 68(D), the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as a background image on the display unit 50a, and the time-saving production mode start suggestion image G41 is displayed superimposed on the time-saving background image G130.

FIG. 69(A) shows the situation at the start of the second jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 69(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. He won 1500 prize balls in the first jackpot game of the second set of jackpots (see Figure 68(C)), and at this time, the game balls entered the first jackpot 14 in the second jackpot game. Since no prize has been won, "1500" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32.

FIG. 69(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first jackpot 14 in the first round game of the second jackpot game related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 69(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed as a round effect on the display unit 50a. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the second jackpot game, the acquired prize ball number image G32 is changed from the previous "1500" to the first grand prize opening 14. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to the winning pitch of 14, is added.

FIG. 69(C) shows the situation immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the second jackpot game related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 69(C), a round image G3 representing that a tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the second jackpot game (4th jackpot game to 6th jackpot game) in the second set of jackpots, it is possible to obtain a maximum of 1500 prize balls, and it is assumed as above, As the acquired prize ball number image G32, "3000" is displayed together with the number of prize balls (1500) that can be acquired in the first jackpot game.

FIG. 69(D) shows the situation immediately after the second jackpot game related to the second set jackpot ends, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the second jackpot game related to the second set jackpot ends. ing. In this case as well, the time-saving performance mode start suggestion image G41 is displayed on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 69(D), as in the case immediately after the first jackpot game related to the second set jackpot ends.

FIG. 70(A) shows the state at the start of the last (third) jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 70(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. By the end of the second jackpot game of the second set of jackpots, 3,000 prize balls have been obtained (see Figure 69(C)), and at this time, in the third jackpot game, the game ball is the first Since no prize has been entered in the grand prize opening 14, "3000" is displayed as the acquired prize pitch number image G32.

FIG. 70(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the third jackpot game related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 70(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed as a round effect on the display unit 50a. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the third jackpot game, the acquired prize ball number image G32 is changed from "3000" immediately before to the first grand prize opening 14. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to the winning pitch of 14, is added.

FIG. 70(C) shows the situation immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the third jackpot game related to the second set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 70(C), a round image G3 representing that a tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the third jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) in the second set of jackpots, it is possible to obtain a maximum of 1500 prize balls, and since it is assumed as described above, As the acquired prize ball number image G32, "4500" is displayed together with the number of prize balls (3000) that can be acquired by the end of the second jackpot game.

FIG. 70(D) shows the ending of the third (last) jackpot game related to the second set jackpot. The jackpot game is a limiter jackpot game, and at the ending of the limiter jackpot game, a set jackpot ending performance that suggests that the set jackpot ends is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(D), in the ending, a CI image G42 and a total number of acquired number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls acquired in the second set jackpot are displayed as a set jackpot ending effect. ing. Although the performance time of the set jackpot ending performance can be set as appropriate, for example, the ending is executed from the time it starts until it ends.

FIG. 71(A) shows the situation at the start of the first jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) related to the third set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 71(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize ball number image G30 is displayed. As mentioned above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the third set jackpot is 3000, so "3000" is displayed as the expected number of prize balls image G31. Further, at this time, since no game balls have entered the first big winning hole 14 in the third set jackpot, "0" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32.

FIG. 71(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the first jackpot game related to the third set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 71(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed as a round effect on the display unit 50a. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the third set jackpot, the number of won prize balls image G32 related to the prize balls that entered the first grand prize opening 14 once. The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 71(C) shows the situation immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the first jackpot game related to the third set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 71(C), a round image G3 representing that a tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the first jackpot game (4th jackpot game to 6th jackpot game) in the third set of jackpots, it is possible to win a maximum of 1500 prize balls, and since it is assumed as described above, the acquisition "1500", which is the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, is displayed as the number of prize balls image G32. Furthermore, since the jackpot game is the first jackpot game related to the third set jackpot, the display unit 50a displays the forget-to-remove card reminder image G40, as in the case of the first set jackpot and the second set jackpot. has been done.

FIG. 71(D) shows the situation immediately after the first jackpot game related to the third set jackpot ends, in other words, immediately after the last round game of the first jackpot game related to the third set jackpot ends. . When the non-limiter jackpot game related to the third set jackpot ends and becomes an advantageous time-saving state, the time-saving production mode start suggestion production is executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, and it is assumed as described above. As shown in FIG. 71(D), the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as a background image on the display unit 50a, and the time-saving production mode start suggestion image G41 is displayed superimposed on the time-saving background image G130.

FIG. 72(A) shows the state at the start of the last (second) jackpot game (fourth jackpot game to sixth jackpot game) related to the third set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 72(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. By the end of the first jackpot game of the third set of jackpots, 1,500 prize balls have been obtained (see Figure 71 (C)), and at this time, in the second jackpot game, the game ball is the first Since no prize has been entered in the grand prize opening 14, "1500" is displayed as the acquired prize pitch number image G32.

FIG. 72(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the second jackpot game related to the third set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 72(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed as a round effect on the display unit 50a. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the second jackpot game, the acquired prize ball number image G32 is changed from the previous "1500" to the first grand prize opening 14. "15", which is the number of prize balls related to the winning pitch of 14, is added.

FIG. 72(C) shows the situation immediately before the end of the last (10th) round game of the second jackpot game related to the third set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 72(C), a round image G3 representing that a tenth round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the last jackpot game (4th jackpot game to 6th jackpot game) in the third set of jackpots, it is possible to win a maximum of 1500 prize balls, and since it is assumed as described above, the acquisition As the number of awarded balls image G32, "3000" is displayed together with the number of prize balls (1500) that can be obtained by the end of the first jackpot game.

FIG. 72(D) shows the ending of the second (last) jackpot game related to the third set jackpot. The jackpot game is a limiter jackpot game, and at the ending of the limiter jackpot game, a set jackpot ending performance that suggests that the set jackpot ends is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72(D), in the ending, a CI image G42 and a total number of acquired number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls acquired in the third set jackpot are displayed as a set jackpot ending effect. has been done. Although the performance time of the set jackpot ending performance can be set as appropriate, for example, the ending is executed from the time it starts until it ends.

In addition, in FIG. 67(D), FIG. 70(D), and FIG. 72(D), the display of the CI image G42 and the display of the total number of acquisitions image G33 are performed simultaneously as a set jackpot ending effect. Some or all of the set jackpot ending performances may be performed separately so that the time periods do not overlap. For example, the set jackpot ending effect may be divided into a first half and a second half, with the CI image G42 being displayed in the first half and the total number of acquisitions image G33 being displayed in the second half. In addition, after the ending, the game basically enters the normal gaming state and also enters the special mode, so for example, in the second half of the set jackpot ending performance, the display section 50a displays an overall background image dedicated to the special mode. The background image is displayed, the total number of acquisitions image G33 is displayed superimposed on the special mode background image, and an image suggesting that the special mode will be entered (special mode start suggestion image) is displayed. You can also do it.

In addition, in the last round game of the jackpot game other than the first among the jackpot games related to the set jackpot, the forget-to-draw-out card warning performance is not performed. However, even in the last round game of the jackpot game other than the first one, the forget-to-draw-out card warning performance may be performed.

FIG. 73(A) shows the situation at the start of the second jackpot that does not constitute a set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 73(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize ball number image G30 is displayed. As mentioned above, the number of prize balls that can be won in the second jackpot is 1200, so "1200" is displayed as the expected number of prize balls image G31. Furthermore, at this time, since no game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 in the second jackpot game, "0" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32.

FIG. 73(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the second jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 73(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the second jackpot game, the prize balls related to one prize entering the first grand prize opening 14 are shown as the acquired prize balls number image G32. The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 73(C) shows the situation just before the last (eighth) round game of the second jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 73(C), a round image G3 representing that the eighth round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the second jackpot game, it is possible to obtain a maximum of 1200 prize balls, and since it is assumed as described above, it is possible to obtain in the second jackpot game as the acquired prize ball number image G32. ``1200'', which is the number of prize balls, is displayed.

FIG. 73(D) shows the ending of the second jackpot game. In the first embodiment, at the ending of the second jackpot game, a jackpot ending effect that suggests that the second jackpot ends is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 73(D), as a jackpot ending effect, a CI image G42 and a total acquisition number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls obtained in the second jackpot game are displayed.

In addition, in the second jackpot game, the forgetting to remove card reminder performance is not executed. After the end of the jackpot game, the game will enter a time-saving state, but the prescribed number of time-savings related to the time-saving state is one time, and after that, the special mode will be exited and the game ball will continue to be fired with the left hand in the normal production mode. This is because the number of game balls in possession may decrease. In other words, after the second jackpot game, there is a possibility that the period during which the number of game balls in possession is difficult to decrease extremely may not continue for a long time. However, in the second jackpot game, a performance to alert the player to forgetting to remove a card may be performed. In this case, since the second jackpot game has an ending, it is desirable to perform an effect to alert the player to forgetting to remove a card at the ending. This is because if a performance calling attention to forgetting to draw a card is executed during a round game, it will interfere with the performance corresponding to the round game and reduce the performance effect of the performance. In this case, the forget-to-remove card reminder image G40 may be displayed in a larger position closer to the center of the display section 50a than in the case of a set jackpot, in other words, in a conspicuous manner.

In addition, in FIG. 73(D), as a jackpot ending effect, the CI image G42 and the total number of acquisitions image G33 are displayed simultaneously, but they are executed separately so that the time periods do not overlap. It's okay. For example, the ending may be divided into two periods, and the CI image G42 may be displayed in the first half, and the total acquisition number image G33 may be displayed in the second half. In addition, after the ending, the user is basically in a disadvantageous time saving state and enters the charge mode, so for example, in the last period of the ending divided into three, the entire background image is displayed on the display unit 50a. A background image exclusively for charge mode (background image for charge mode) is displayed, and a total acquisition number image G33 is displayed superimposed on the background image for charge mode, and an image suggesting that the charge mode will be entered (charge mode background image) is displayed. mode start suggestion image) may be displayed in a display mode like the time-saving effect mode start suggestion image G41.

FIG. 74(A) shows the situation at the start of the third jackpot that does not constitute a set jackpot. As shown in FIG. 74(A), an opening image G1 is displayed on the display section 50a as an opening effect. Further, the prize ball number performance is executed from the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, a prize ball number image G30 is displayed. As mentioned above, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the third jackpot is 1200, so "1200" is displayed as the expected number of prize balls image G31. Further, at this time, since no game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 in the third jackpot game, "0" is displayed as the acquired prize ball number image G32.

FIG. 74(B) shows the situation immediately after the game ball first enters the first big winning hole 14 in the first round game of the third jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 74(B), a round image G3 representing that a first round game is being executed is displayed as a round effect on the display unit 50a. In addition, since the game ball first entered the first grand prize opening 14 in the third jackpot game, the prize balls related to one prize entering the first grand prize opening 14 are shown as the acquired prize balls number image G32. The number "15" is displayed.

FIG. 74(C) shows the situation just before the last (eighth) round game of the third jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 73(C), a round image G3 representing that the eighth round game is being executed is displayed on the display unit 50a as a round effect. In addition, in the third jackpot game, it is possible to obtain a maximum of 1200 prize balls, and since it is assumed as described above, it is possible to obtain in the third jackpot game as the acquired prize ball number image G32. ``1200'', which is the number of prize balls, is displayed.

FIG. 74(D) shows the ending of the third jackpot game. In the first embodiment, at the ending of the third jackpot game, a jackpot ending effect that suggests that the third jackpot ends is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 74(D), as a jackpot ending performance, a CI image G42 and a total acquisition number image G33 representing the total number of prize balls obtained in the third jackpot game are displayed.

In addition, in the third jackpot game, the forgetting to remove card reminder performance is not executed. This is because after the end of the jackpot game, the game enters the normal game state, so if you continue to shoot the game balls normally by hitting left-handed, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls will decrease.

In addition, in FIG. 74(D), as a jackpot ending effect, the CI image G42 and the total number of acquisitions image G33 are displayed simultaneously, but they are executed separately so that the time periods do not overlap. It's okay. For example, the jackpot ending effect may be divided into a first half and a second half, with the CI image G42 being displayed in the first half and the total number of acquisitions image G33 being displayed in the second half. In addition, after the ending, the normal game state and the normal performance mode are entered, so for example, in the latter half of the jackpot ending performance, the background image G111 for the normal performance mode is displayed on the display section 50a as the overall background image. The total number of acquisitions image G33 is displayed superimposed on the normal production mode background image G111, and an image suggesting that the normal production mode will be entered (normal production mode start suggestion image) indicates the start of the time-saving production mode. It may be displayed in a display mode like the suggestion image G41.

Next, the performance that the pachinko game machine PY1 can execute in the small winning game will be explained. The performance control microcomputer 121 performs a small hit medium right-hitting promotion performance that promotes firing the game ball by hitting the right hand in a small winning game, and a V that promotes making the game ball pass through the specific area 16. Perform prize-winning promotion performances. This is a condition for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 in the small winning game to execute the jackpot game after the small winning game, and the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16. This is because the second big prize opening 15 is provided in the right gaming area 6B. Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes a V winning notification performance to notify that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16. This is to reassure the players.

In addition, the small hit medium-right hit promotion performance, the V winning promotion performance, and the V winning notification performance are executed in order. Specifically, in a small winning game, when the opening ends, in other words, when the second big prize opening 15 is opened for the first time, a small winning middle right hit promotion performance is first started. The small hit medium right hit promotion effect is executed over 1.5 seconds. When the small hit medium-right hit promotion performance ends, it switches to the V winning promotion performance. When the game ball passes through the specific area 16 while the V winning promotion performance is being executed, the V winning promotion performance is switched to the V winning notification performance. Thereafter, the V winning notification performance is executed until the small winning game ends.

The small hit medium-right hit promotion performance, the V winning promotion performance, and the V winning notification performance are executed on the display section 50a. The small hit medium right hitting promotion performance is composed of display of a first small hit medium right hitting promotion image G50 and a second small hit medium right hitting promotion image G51 that promote firing the game ball by right hitting. The first small hit medium-right hitting promotion image G50 represents the behavior of a game ball being hit to the right, and includes a game area image G50a representing a part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 including the game area 6, and a trajectory of the game ball. and a game ball trajectory image G50b. The second small hit medium-right hitting promotion image G51 is composed of a block arrow representing the general direction of the specific area 16, and the block arrow includes the words "right hitting".

The V winning promotion performance is composed of displaying an image G53 (V winning promotion image G53) that encourages the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. The V winning promotion image G53 includes an image G53a (V winning promotion phrase image G53a) that expresses in words (“Aim for V” in the first embodiment) the game ball passing through the specific area 16, and the small It includes an image G53b (V winning possible remaining time G53b) representing the remaining time (V winning possible remaining time) until the opening of the second big winning opening 15 in the winning game ends. Note that the V winning possible remaining time G53b consists of a linear progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the V winning possible remaining time.

The V winning notification performance is composed of displaying an image G54 (V winning notification image G54) that notifies that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16. The V winning notification image G54 is composed of the character "V".

In addition, the performance aspects of the small hit middle right hit promotion performance, the V winning prize promotion performance, and the V winning notification performance in the small winning game are such that if you win a big hit in the small winning game, you will be in an advantageous time shortening state after the jackpot game ends. , differs from other cases. In other cases, if you win a jackpot in the small winning game, you will be in a disadvantageous time shortening state after the jackpot game ends, or even if you win a jackpot in the small winning game, the jackpot game becomes a limiter jackpot game, so you can win the jackpot. There are cases where the game returns to the normal gaming state after the game ends. Then, in the latter case, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the small hit middle right hitting promotion performance, the V winning promotion performance, and the V winning notification performance in a grand manner, and in the former case, the A hitting-right-of-win promotion performance, a V-winning promotion performance, and a V-winning notification performance are performed sparingly (small). In the former case, when the advantageous time-saving state is reached, the special figure 2 variable display is executed 99 times in the time-saving state, so the player is not in a hurry to win the V prize in the time-saving state, which promotes small hits and medium-right hits. While it is not necessary to perform the performance, V winning promotion performance, and V winning notification performance in a very flashy manner, in the case of the latter, if the time is shortened at a disadvantage, the special map 2 variable display will be executed only 5 times, including the remaining reservation. In addition, when the normal gaming state is entered, the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining reservation can only be executed 4 times, and the player is in a hurry to win the V prize. This is because it is necessary to perform the V winning notification performance in a flashy manner. In addition, in the following, the small hit middle right-handed promotion performance, the V winning prize promotion performance, and the V winning prize notification performance will be referred to as "small winning medium specific performance", and in the case of the former, the small winning medium specific performance will be referred to as "the small winning medium specific performance". In the latter case, the small winning medium specific performance is referred to as the ``second small winning medium specific performance''.

Next, a specific example of the small hit medium specific performance will be explained. First, the second small hit medium specific performance will be explained. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example of the second small hit medium specific performance. FIG. 75(A) is a diagram showing the early stage of the small hit medium-right hitting promotion performance, FIG. 75(B) is a diagram showing the state after the beginning of the small winning medium right hitting promotion performance, and FIG. 75(C) 75(D) is a diagram showing the state at the start of the V winning promotion performance, FIG. 75(D) is a diagram showing the state in the middle of the V winning promotion performance, and FIG. 75(E) is a diagram showing the state of the V winning prize notification performance. It is.

As shown in FIG. 75, the small hit medium right hitting promotion performance, the V winning promotion performance, and the V winning notification performance in the second small winning medium specific performance are executed on the entire screen of the display unit 50a. When the small hit medium right hitting promotion effect is started, the first small hit medium right hitting promotion image G50 is initially displayed on the background image displayed on the entire screen of the display section 50a. Here, a game area image G50a representing the upper end of the game area 6 is displayed, and a trajectory of a game ball moving toward the right game area 6B in the game area 6 represented by the game area image G50a is displayed. A game ball trajectory image G50b is displayed. Then, when the trajectory of the game ball according to the game ball trajectory image G50b approaches the right gaming area 6B, as shown in FIG. Image G51 is displayed. Furthermore, when the second small hit medium-right hit promotion image G51 is displayed, the game area 6 represented in the game area image G50a changes in accordance with the movement of the trajectory of the game ball related to the game ball trajectory image G50b. It moves from the upper end to the right gaming area 6B.

Next, when the trajectory of the game ball according to the game ball trajectory image G50b reaches the second grand prize opening 15 of the gaming area 6 represented in the gaming area image G50a, as shown in FIG. 75(C), The performance changes from the small hit medium-right hit promotion to the V winning promotion. Specifically, the second small hit medium-right hit promotion image G51 disappears, and a large V winning promotion image G53 is displayed on the left half of the display section 50a. The V winning promotion performance continues until the game ball passes through the specific area 16, but during that time, as shown in FIG. The V winning possible remaining time G53b changes in accordance with the passage of time.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, as shown in FIG. 75(E), the V winning promotion performance is switched to the V winning notification performance. Specifically, the V winning prize promotion image G53 disappears, and the V winning prize notification image G54 is displayed in a large size in the center of the display section 50a.

Next, the specific performance during the first small hit will be explained. FIG. 76 shows a specific example of the first small hit medium specific performance. FIG. 76(A) is a diagram showing the early stage of the small hit medium-right hitting promotion performance, FIG. 76(B) is a diagram showing the state after the beginning of the small winning medium right hitting promotion performance, FIG. 76(C) 76(D) is a diagram showing the state at the start of the V winning promotion performance, FIG. 76(D) is a diagram showing the state in the middle of the V winning promotion performance, and FIG. 76(E) is a diagram showing the state of the V winning prize notification performance. It is.

As shown in FIG. 76, the small hit medium right hitting promotion performance, the V winning promotion performance, and the V winning notification performance in the first small winning medium specific performance are a reduced screen 50g formed in a part of the screen of the display unit 50a. It is executed in The reduced screen 50g is formed when the opening ends, and disappears when the small winning game ends. Further, the reduced screen 50g is formed in a rectangular shape having approximately the same aspect ratio as the entire screen of the display section 50a, and approximately 1/5 to 1/8 the size of the entire screen of the display section 50a. It is displayed at the right end of the section 50a and approximately at the center in the vertical direction.

Note that the shape, size, and display position of the reduced screen 50g may be changed as appropriate. However, the size of the reduced screen 50g is preferably smaller than 1/4 of the entire screen of the display section 50a. This is to allow the modest small hit medium specific effect to be executed in a somewhat small manner.

Then, when the small hit medium hit right promotion performance is started, from then on, most of the second small hit medium specific performance performed on the entire screen of the display section 50a is executed on the reduced screen 50g. Specifically, regarding the first small hit medium right hitting promotion image G50, V winning promotion image G53, and V winning notification image G54 related to the small winning medium hitting right promoting performance, in the case of the second small winning medium hitting specific presentation, The contents displayed on the entire screen of the display section 50a are displayed as they are on the reduced screen 50g. However, the second small hit medium hit right promotion image G51 is executed on the entire screen of the display unit 50a, as in the case of the second small hit medium specific performance.

In addition, in FIG. 76(B), the second small hit middle right hitting promotion image G51 is displayed at a predetermined distance from the reduced screen 50g so as not to overlap with the reduced screen 50g, but it does not overlap with the reduced screen 50g. It may also be displayed as follows.

Although not shown in FIG. 76, when the reduced screen 50g is formed in the 1st small winning medium specific effect, the entire screen of the display section 50a displays the 1st small winning medium as the background of the reduced screen 50g. A background image with content corresponding to the specific effect is displayed. The content of the background image here can be set as appropriate, but for example, content related to the subject matter of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 that is unrelated to the content related to the game, such as right-handed hitting and the game ball passing through the specific area 16. It's good as well.

Next, effects that can be executed by the pachinko game machine PY1 in the special mode will be explained. The performance control microcomputer 121 shifts to the special mode when the first special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining reservation is started as the production mode, and the last special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining reservation is ended. exit the special mode.

The special figure variation effects in the special mode include a first special effect and a second special effect. The first special performance is executed with a special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation of reservation order 1 to reservation order 3 related to the remaining reservation, and the second special performance is executed with the special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the reservation order 4 of reservation order 4 related to the remaining reservation. 2 is executed with special figure 2 variable display corresponding to reservation. Therefore, when shifting to the special mode, if there are less than 4 pieces remaining, the second special effect will not be executed in the special mode.

In each first special performance, an animation is displayed on the display section 50a of a performance in which a pitcher, who is the main character, and a batter, who is an enemy character, face off in one at-bat of a baseball game. Then, if it is a jackpot, the enemy character hits a home run at the end, and if it is a loss, the enemy character is hit at the end and is out.

Moreover, each first special effect is mutually associated. The relationship between the performances of the first special performance will be explained below. If the jackpot determination result related to the special figure 2 variable display is a loss, the batter is struck out at the end of the first special performance, resulting in one out. Then, when the special figure 2 variable display is executed next, and the first special effect is executed with the special figure 2 variable display, the 1 out is taken over and the next first special effect is executed, and the corresponding The next first special performance is performed with the out count increased by one.

Further, if the last first special performance is a loss, the game always ends with 3 outs, regardless of the number of remaining reservations at the time of transition to the special mode. Therefore, the out count associated with each first special performance differs depending on the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode.

If the number of remaining pending items when moving to the special mode is 4, the out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special drawing 2 pending in the pending order 1 related to the remaining pending will be "0", and the remaining pending number will be "0". The out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation in the reservation order 2 is "1", and the out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation in the reservation order 3 related to the remaining reservation is "1". It becomes "2". In other words, if the number of remaining balls when entering the special mode is 4, the first special effect will start with "0" out, and from then on, every time the batter is hit, in other words, every time there is a loss, there will be an out. The count increases by one and becomes "3" out at the end of the first special performance corresponding to the pending order 3. Then, the second special effect is executed with the special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the reservation order 4.

If the number of remaining pending items when transitioning to the special mode is 3, the out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special figure 2 pending in the pending order 1 related to the remaining pending will be "0", and the remaining pending number will be 0. The out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation in the reservation order 2 is "1", and the out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation in the reservation order 3 related to the remaining reservation is "1". It becomes "2". In other words, if the number of remaining balls when entering the special mode is 3, the first special effect will start with "0" out, and from then on, every time the batter is hit, in other words, every time there is a loss, there will be an out. The count increases by one and becomes "3" out at the end of the first special performance corresponding to the pending order 3. Then, when the last first special performance ends, the special mode shifts to the normal performance mode without performing the second special performance.

If the number of remaining pending items when moving to the special mode is 2, the out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special drawing 2 pending in the pending order 1 related to the remaining pending will be "1", and the remaining pending number will be "1". The out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation in the reservation order 2 is "2". In other words, if the number of remaining balls when entering the special mode is 2, the first special effect will start with "1" out, and from then on, every time the batter is hit, in other words, every time the batter loses, it will be out. The count increases by one and becomes "3" out at the end of the first special performance corresponding to the pending order 2. Then, when the last first special performance ends, the special mode shifts to the normal performance mode without performing the second special performance.

When the number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode is 1, the out count in the first special performance corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation in the reservation order 1 related to the remaining reservation is "2". In other words, if the number of remaining pieces when moving to the special mode is 1, the first special effect starts with "2" out, and when the batter is struck out, in other words, when it is a loss, the out count increases by 1. It becomes "3" out. When the first special performance ends, the special mode shifts to the normal performance mode without performing the second special performance.

Furthermore, types of enemy characters that appear (displayed) in the first special performance include enemy character X, enemy character Y, and enemy character Z. The types of these enemy characters are associated with the out count related to the first special performance. Specifically, in the first special performance that starts with an out count of "0", enemy character appears (confronts the main character), and in the first special effect that starts with an out count of "2", an enemy character Z appears (confronts the main character).

In the first special production, the main character, who is a pitcher, and the enemy character, who is a batter, compete in one at-bat. During that one at-bat, the main character throws several balls, and the ball count and strike count increase. The confrontation progresses. Note that detailed presentation contents of the first special presentation will be described later.

The second special performance is executed based on the special figure variation pattern. The second special performance is executed in the last special figure 2 variable display when the number of remaining reservations is the maximum 4 at the time of transition to the special mode. Therefore, the execution of the second special effect means that if the first special effect three times ends in a loss and results in 3 outs, and the special figure 2 variable display does not result in a jackpot, the game is played in the normal effect mode, in other words. This is an undesirable situation for the player, who ends up playing a game in which the special figure 1 variable display is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, in the second special performance, after raising an objection to the "ball" judgment in the first and final special performance, a video judgment is made regarding the judgment, and ultimately whether the judgment is overturned or not. An animation of branching performance content is displayed as a background image on the entire screen of the display unit 50a. Then, if it is a small hit or a big hit, the determination is reversed, and if it is a loss, the determination is maintained.

Next, the count image G60 displayed on the display section 50a in the first special effect will be explained. The count image G60 displays the ball count and strike count in one turn at bat, as well as the out count in that one turn at bat. A specific example of the count image G60 is shown in FIG. The count image G60 represents a general display device that displays a ball count, a strike count, and an out count using the BSO method. In each at-bat, the circles lined up to the right of the letter "B" representing a ball, and the circles lined up to the right of the letter "S" representing a strike, move from left to right according to the progress of the match. Lights up sequentially. Further, as the out count increases, the circles arranged on the right side of the letter "O" representing out light up sequentially from left to right. Note that when the first special effect is being executed, the count image G60 is basically displayed in the left corner of the display section 50a, superimposed on a first special effect background image G150 dedicated to the first special effect, which will be described later. be done.

Here, FIG. 78 shows the overall production flow of the special mode. In FIG. 78, the overall performance flow of the special mode is schematically shown using the display contents displayed on the display unit 50a for each number of remaining reservations when shifting to the special mode. Figure 78 (A) shows the performance flow when the number of remaining items is 4, Figure 78 (B) represents the performance flow when the number of remaining items is 3, and Figure 78 (C) shows the performance flow when the number of remaining items is 3. FIG. 78(D) shows the performance flow when the number of items remaining is 2, and FIG. 78(D) represents the performance flow when the number of remaining items is 1. Further, although FIG. 78 shows the display content displayed on the display unit 50a, the display content is the display content at the start of each first special effect. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 78, it is assumed that all special figure 2 variable displays result in a loss.

The relationship between the number of remaining reservations when transitioning to the special mode, the order of reservation related to the remaining reservations, and the out count, and the relationship between the out count and the type of enemy character are as described above, but as shown in FIG. 78(A) ~As shown in FIG. 78(D), the portion of the count image G60 representing the outcount (the part of the character "O") right side) has also changed. Note that the portion of the count image G60 representing an out count (the right side of the letter "O") changes when one out is confirmed at the end of the first special effect.

Further, at the start of each first special performance, an enemy character related to the first special performance is displayed in the center of the display section 50a. Then, after this, the confrontation between the enemy character and the main character is developed in the first special effect background image G150.

Further, at the start of each first special performance, a remaining number of characters to face off image G61 representing the remaining number of enemy characters who can face off in the special mode is displayed in the upper left corner of the display section 50a. Specifically, when the (initial) first special performance related to reservation order 1 in the special mode starts with an out count of "0" (the number of remaining reservations when moving to the special mode is 4 or 3) If you continue to lose (if you continue to be out), you will face off against up to three enemy characters including the first special effect, so "3 more characters" will be displayed. If there is one out in the first at-bat confrontation performance, you will face up to two enemy characters including the first special performance related to the next pending order 2, so the first special production related to the pending order 2 will start. Sometimes it will say "2 more people". Furthermore, if the first special effect related to pending order 2 results in 1 out, you will face off against a maximum of one enemy character, including the first special effect related to the next pending order 3, so the first special effect related to pending order 3 1. At the start of the special performance, "1 person left" is displayed.

Similarly, if the (first) first special performance related to reservation order 1 in special mode starts with an out count of "1" (if the number of reservations remaining when transitioning to special mode is 2), If you continue to lose (keep going out) after that, you will face off against up to two enemy characters, including the first special effect, so "2 more characters" will be displayed. If the first special performance results in 1 out, you will face off against a maximum of one enemy character, including the first special performance related to the next pending order 2, so the first special performance related to the pending order 2 will start. Sometimes the message "One more person left" is displayed.

In addition, if the (initial) first special performance related to reservation order 1 in special mode starts with an out count of "2" (if the number of reservations remaining at the time of transition to special mode is 1), the corresponding 1. Since this is the last special performance, "1 person left" is displayed.

In this way, the image G61 of remaining number of players for confrontation represents the remaining number of enemy characters that can be confronted in the special mode, but this numerical part is the number of remaining executions of the first special effect that can be performed in the special mode. Therefore, it essentially represents the remaining number of executions of the first special effect that can be executed in the special mode.

Next, the content of the first special performance will be explained. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 variation pattern that can be determined during the period in which the first special effect can be executed in the special mode (the period from the transition to the normal gaming state until the third special figure 2 variable display is executed) As, the long first special jackpot fluctuation related to the jackpot, the medium first special jackpot fluctuation, and the short first special jackpot fluctuation, the long first special small winning fluctuation related to the small hit, the medium first special small winning fluctuation, and the short first special jackpot fluctuation. There are 1 special small winning variation, long 1st special losing variation, medium 1st special losing variation, and short 1st special losing variation related to losing (see FIG. 57).

In the special figure 2 variable display of the long first special jackpot variation, the long first special small win variation, and the long first special loss variation, the long first special effect is executed in common. In the special figure 2 variable display of the medium 1st special jackpot variation, the medium 1st special small win variation, and the medium 1st special loss variation, the medium time 1st special effect is executed in common. In the special figure 2 variable display of the short first special jackpot variation, the short first special small win variation, and the short first special loss variation, the short first special effect is executed in common.

The long-time first special performance, the medium-time first special performance, and the short-time first special performance are all types of first special performance, and are distinguished by the difference in performance time. The long-time first special performance is the first special performance with the longest production time among the three, the short-time first special production is the first special production with the shortest production time among the three, and the medium-time first special production is the first special production with the longest production time among the three. The special performance is a first special performance whose performance time is longer than the short-time first special performance and shorter than the long-time first special performance.

In addition, in the following, the long first special jackpot fluctuation, the long first special small hit fluctuation, and the long first special loss fluctuation are referred to as "long time first special performance fluctuation", and the medium first special jackpot fluctuation, medium The 1st special small hit variation and the medium 1st special loss variation are referred to as the "medium time 1st special effect variation", and the short 1st special jackpot variation, the short 1st special small win variation, and the short 1st special loss variation The fluctuation may also be referred to as a "short-time first special effect fluctuation."

In addition, the long first special jackpot fluctuation, the medium first special jackpot fluctuation, and the short first special jackpot fluctuation are referred to as the "first special performance jackpot fluctuation", the long first special small hit fluctuation, the medium first special small The winning fluctuation and the short first special small winning fluctuation are referred to as the "first special performance small winning fluctuation", and the long first special losing fluctuation, the medium first special losing fluctuation, and the short first special losing fluctuation are referred to as the "first special performance small winning fluctuation". This is sometimes referred to as the "first special performance loss variation."

Furthermore, the first special performance fluctuation for a long time, the first special performance fluctuation for a medium time, and the first special performance fluctuation for a short time, the first special performance jackpot fluctuation, the first special performance small win fluctuation, and the first special The performance loss fluctuations are sometimes collectively referred to as "first special performance fluctuations."

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time related to the long first special jackpot variation and the long first special small win variation is longer than the special symbol variation time related to the long first special loss variation, and the medium first special jackpot variation, The special symbol variation time related to the medium 1st special small hit variation is longer than the special symbol variation time related to the medium 1st special loss variation, and the special symbol variation time related to the short 1st special jackpot variation and the short 1st special small winning variation are longer. The figure variation time is longer than the special figure variation time related to the short first special loss variation. This is because in the case of a jackpot or a small win, a performance (specific notification performance) that notifies the jackpot or small win is executed, which is not performed in the case of a loss.

In the first special performance, regardless of the type, in other words, regardless of the difference in performance time, the main character who is a pitcher and the enemy character who is a batter compete in one turn at bat. During a single turn at bat, the main character throws the ball multiple times, and the ball count and strike count increase as the battle progresses, and in the end, the result is that the enemy character hits a home run. The result is that the ball is batted down and one out is taken. The result of a home run suggests a small or big hit, and the result of one out suggests a loss. That is, although the pitcher is the main character, in the first special performance, the advantageous development from the perspective of the enemy character, the batter, becomes the content of the performance that is advantageous to the player.

Regardless of the type of the first special effect, the main character will throw the ball multiple times in a single turn at bat, but the length of the effect corresponds to the length of time required for a single turn at bat, so the effect will take a long time. As the game progresses, the number of counts (ball count, strike count) tends to increase. Therefore, the number of counts (ball count, strike count) is most likely to increase during the long-time first special performance, and the number of counts (ball count, strike count) is most difficult to increase during the first short-time special performance. This is the first special performance for a short time. In addition, the expectation level for a jackpot and the expectation level for a small win are higher in the order of long-time first special performance > middle-time first special performance > short-time first special performance, so the count (ball count, strike count) It can also be said that as the number increases, the expectations for a big win and the expectations for a small win also increase.

The performance content of the first special performance is determined by the performance control microcomputer 121 based on the first special performance variation. A plurality of performance contents (performance patterns) are associated with each first special performance variation. In addition, the first special performance is based on the long first special jackpot fluctuation, the first special performance is based on the long first special small hit fluctuation, the first special performance is based on the medium first special jackpot fluctuation, and the medium first special small hit fluctuation. The same performance content is performed in each of the first special performance based on the short first special jackpot variation and the first special performance based on the short first special small win variation. However, all or some of them may have completely different presentation contents, or may be partially the same and partially different.

In addition, a first special performance based on the long first special small hit fluctuation (long first special jackpot fluctuation), a first special performance based on the long first special loss fluctuation, a medium first special small hit fluctuation (medium first special jackpot fluctuation) The first special performance based on the fluctuation) and the first special performance based on the medium first special loss fluctuation, and the first special performance based on the short first special small hit fluctuation (short first special jackpot fluctuation) and the first short special loss Each of the first special performances based on the fluctuations has a corresponding relationship with respect to the content of the performance. Specifically, the same performance content is performed until the final result (home run or hit). However, all or some of them may have completely different presentation contents, or may be partially the same and partially different.

When the production control microcomputer 121 receives a special figure variation start command indicating the first special production variation, for example, in step S4306, based on the special figure variation start command, the production control microcomputer 121 changes the production content of the first special production (the first A first special effect pattern determination is performed to determine a special effect pattern (special effect pattern).

The first special performance pattern determination is performed with reference to the first special performance pattern determination table. Examples of the configuration of the first special effect pattern determination table are shown in FIGS. 79 to 80. As shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the first special effect pattern determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern. Specifically, the first special performance pattern determination table includes a first special performance pattern determination table for a long first special jackpot variation, a first special long special small win variation, and a first special performance pattern determination table for a long first special loss variation. Performance pattern determination table, first special performance pattern determination table for medium 1st special jackpot variation, and medium 1st special small hit variation, first special performance pattern determination table for medium 1st special loss variation, short 1st special There is a first special performance pattern determination table for jackpot fluctuations and short first special small win fluctuations, and a first special performance pattern determination table for short first special loss fluctuations. Each of the first special effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 79 to 80 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each first special effect pattern becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIGS. 79 to 80.

Here, the winning process of the one-at-bat showdown performed in the first special performance will be explained using FIGS. 79 to 80. The rightmost item (performance content) in each first special performance pattern determination table is the performance flow of the first special performance of that first special performance pattern. The production flow includes a winning process of a one-turn at bat as a specific production story.

``Ball'', ``Missing'', ``Foul'', ``Home Run'', ``Strikeout'', and ``Left Fly'' constitute the performance flow described in the performance content of each first special performance pattern determination table. There is also "reach". Since these are elements that constitute the performance flow of the first special performance, they will be referred to as "first special performance flow constituent elements" below. The elements other than "Reach" among the first special performance flow components are elements that constitute the winning process related to the one-at-bat showdown between the main character and the enemy character, so they will be referred to as "winning process constituent elements" below.

It should be noted that "whipping" as a "game process component" refers to a strike resulting from a whiffing when the strike count is "0" or "1", and the turn at bat continues after the whiffing. Also, a "strikeout" generally involves a strike due to a whiff or a strike due to a miss, but in this case, a "strikeout" is the result of a strike due to a whiff when the strike count is "2". Therefore, as a ``component of the winning process'', it is distinguished from ``whipping''.

"Ball", "Whisper", "Foul", "Home Run", "Strikeout", and "Left Fly" included in "Game Process Components" are all the result of the enemy character's response to the pitching of the protagonist character. . In other words, a pitch is always made by the main character before a ``ball,'' ``a whiff,'' a ``foul,'' a ``home run,'' a ``strikeout,'' and a ``left fly,'' and specific details regarding each component of the game process are made. The content of the performance includes pitching by the main character.

Among the components of the game process, "home run", "strikeout", and "left fly" are performed at the end of the first special effect, in other words, the first special effect ends the turn at bat and indicates the jackpot result. It is positioned as the final result of a special production (a one-at-bat showdown). "Home run" is the final result of the first special production (one at-bat confrontation) that suggests a big or small hit, and "strikeout" and "left fly" are the final result of the first special production (one at-bat) that suggests a loss. This is the final result of the batting showdown. On the other hand, "ball", "missing shot", and "foul" are not performed at the end of the first special performance, in other words, they are positioned as results during subsequent turns at bat. Therefore, "ball," "missing shot," and "foul" do not directly indicate a jackpot determination result. In the following, "home runs," "strikeouts," and "left field flies" are referred to as "final results of the game process," and "balls," "swiffs," and "fouls" are referred to as "intermediate results of the game process." to be called.

The ball count increases by one when a "ball" is derived as an intermediate result, and the strike count increases by one when a "missing shot" is derived as an intermediate result. Further, when the strike count is "0" or "1", if a "foul" is derived as an intermediate result, the strike count is increased by one. That is, the process of winning the showdown progresses by deriving intermediate results. Furthermore, a "strikeout" is derived as the final result of the first special effect, but since a "strikeout" involves a strike due to a whiff, when a "strikeout" is derived, the strike count increases by one, and the out count is counted. increases by one.

Further, a reach is included as a component of the first special effect flow, and after the reach, a "foul", a "home run", or a "strikeout" is derived. That is, "foul," "home run," and "strikeout" can be derived in accordance with the establishment of a reach. A "foul" can be derived in the case of a small win, a big win, or a loss. On the other hand, a "home run" is derived in the case of a small hit or a jackpot, and a "strikeout" is derived in the case of a loss.

As described above, in the first special performance, an advantageous development from the perspective of the enemy character, the batter, becomes the content of the performance that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the mid-game result "ball" is positioned as performance content that is advantageous to the player, and the mid-game result "missing" is positioned as performance content that is disadvantageous to the player. Then, as shown in the selection rates shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the ball count and strike count increase in the first special effect, but as the ball count increases in the end, the player becomes more advantageous. The expectation of winning big or small will increase.

Here, a specific performance flow of the first special performance will be explained. For example, in the first special performance pattern "TEP002", the pitcher first throws the ball, the batter sees it off, and it becomes a ball (ball). Next, the pitcher throws the ball and the batter whiffs, resulting in a strike. Next, after the reach is established (reach), the pitcher throws the ball and the batter swings it, but it becomes a foul ball (foul). Finally, the pitcher throws the ball and the batter swings it, resulting in a home run. With this home run, the first special performance ends, and a small winning game or a jackpot game is performed.

In addition, in the first special production pattern "TEP102", after a reach is established (reach), until the pitcher throws the ball and the batter swings it, but it becomes a foul ball (foul), the first special production pattern "TEP002" is used. This is the same as in the case of . Finally, when the pitcher throws the ball, the batter whiffs and strikes out (a strikeout). With this strikeout, the first special effect ends, and the next special figure variable display becomes executable. Therefore, if the out count becomes "1" or "2" as a result of a strikeout in the first special performance, the next first special performance is subsequently executed.

Next, specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special performance will be explained. In the middle of the first special performance, immediately after "ball" or "missing shot" is derived as an intermediate result, specific display of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed on the display section 50a. As a specific display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, which had been displayed in a state that was difficult to see and had not been displayed, are displayed all at once in a state where they are variably displayed approximately at the vertical center of the display section 50a. Immediately after that, the display appears in a temporary stop state, and then returns to a state where it is difficult to see. Incidentally, the difficult-to-visualize state related to the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be replaced with a state in which they are not displayed.

In the specific display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3, when the temporary stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the display contents of the temporary stop display (stop display mode) are the types of intermediate results ("ball", "missing shot", etc.). ”). The stop display mode associated with "ball" is what is called "success", and the stop display mode associated with "missing" is what is called "miss shot". In the first embodiment, the order is "(1, 2, 3), (4, 5, 6), (7, 8, 9) = left effect pattern EZ1, middle effect pattern EZ2, right effect pattern EZ3" ” Three patterns are set. On the other hand, there are 3 patterns for the randomization: "(1, 5, 4), (2, 7, 6), (3, 9, 8) = left effect pattern EZ1, middle effect pattern EZ2, right effect pattern EZ3" is set.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the regular pattern and the random pattern do not suggest the degree of expectation for a jackpot or the degree of expectation for a small win. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines the first special performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines a regular pattern and a random pattern for each "ball" and "missing shot" included in the first special performance pattern. It is also assumed that the selection rate of each sequential pattern and each random pattern at the time of determination is set to be the same. Note that the regular pattern and the random pattern may suggest the degree of expectation for a jackpot and the degree of expectation for a small win.

In addition, in the specific display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, the performance contents when the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 appear all at once in a state where they are displayed in a variable manner and are easily visible can be set as appropriate. With the three EZ3s lined up side by side, each of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 appears while rotating on the spot with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation. The rotation in this case constitutes the fluctuating display.

Further, when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a temporary stop state, immediately after that, while the temporary stop display is maintained, an intermediate result corresponding image G62 corresponding to the intermediate result is displayed in a superimposed manner on the temporary stop display. Ru. If the intermediate result is "ball", an image G62 corresponding to the intermediate result with the words "ball" is displayed, and if the intermediate result is "missing", an image G62 corresponding to the intermediate result with the characters "strike" is displayed. be done.

The intermediate result corresponding image G62 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Then, when the intermediate result corresponding image G62 disappears, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which had been temporarily stopped and displayed, return to a state where they are difficult to see while being displayed again in a fluctuating manner, and the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 ends. , proceed to the next first special effect flow component.

In addition, when the intermediate result corresponding image G62 disappears, it moves while being deformed so as to be sucked toward the part of the count image G60 corresponding to the count that increases due to the "ball" or "missing shot". When the intermediate result corresponding image G62 reaches the corresponding portion in the count image G60, it disappears while being sucked into the corresponding portion in the flow, and the corresponding portion in the count image G60 lights up.

In this way, in the animation, after the pitcher throws the ball and the batter responds, "ball" or "missing" is derived as an intermediate result, the specific display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and By executing the intermediate result corresponding image G62 overlappingly, the intermediate result is suggested, the count image G60 changes accordingly, and the series of steps until the specific display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is completed. is one performance unit (block) related to the intermediate results ("ball" and "miss shot"), and in the first special performance, this intermediate result ("ball" and "miss shot") One performance unit (block) related to this is repeated multiple times.

Further, after the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 ends, the pitcher starts pitching or reach is established according to the next intermediate result ("ball" and "missing shot"). When a reach is achieved, the easily visible left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 are slowly faded in from the upper end of the display section 50a downward. At this time, the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 are composed of the same type of performance pattern G10. Then, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 continue to descend and stop at approximately the center in the vertical direction, and a reach is established.

Further, the intermediate result corresponding image G62 also includes an intermediate result corresponding image G62 which corresponds to the intermediate result "foul" and includes the character "foul". However, when a "foul" is derived as an intermediate result, the specific display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is not performed as in the case of "ball" or "missing shot", and the pitcher throws the ball in the animation. , when the batter responds and "foul" is derived as an intermediate result, an intermediate result corresponding image G62 corresponding to "foul" is displayed.

The intermediate result corresponding image G62 corresponding to "foul" is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds). Then, when the intermediate result corresponding image G62 corresponding to "foul" is displayed, if the previous strike count is "0" or "1", the strike count is increased by one from there. In such a case, when the intermediate result corresponding image G62 disappears, it moves while being deformed so as to be sucked toward the part of the count image G60 corresponding to the out count increased by the "foul". When the intermediate result corresponding image G62 reaches the corresponding portion in the count image G60, it disappears while being sucked into the corresponding portion in the flow, and the corresponding portion in the count image G60 lights up.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the first special effect, when the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3, which are composed of two effect patterns G10 of the same type, slowly fade in when they are aligned, the reach is guaranteed. However, it may be possible to cause a reach error in which the display does not stop at approximately the center in the vertical direction, but rapidly descends from there and fades out from the lower end of the display section 50a.

Next, a specific example of the first special effect performed on the display section 50a will be described using FIGS. 81 to 84. Here, the first special effect pattern "TEP002" will be explained as an example. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a specific example of the first special effect flow component "ball" in the first special effect pattern "TEP002", and FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a specific example of the first special performance flow component "Miss swing", and FIG. 83 shows the third and fourth first special performance flow component "Reach" in the first special performance pattern "TEP002", FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a specific example of "foul", and FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a specific example of the fifth first special effect flow component "bohm run" in the first special effect pattern "TEP002". It is assumed that the first special performance of the first special performance pattern "TEP002" starts from an out count of "0".

As shown in FIG. 81(A), in the first special effect flow component related to "ball," first, in the animation that constitutes the first special effect background image G150, the pitcher (main character) hits the batter with the ball. A scene of pitching is displayed (pitching scene). Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a scene in which the batter sees off the ball is displayed (ball seeing off scene). Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a specific display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and the order in which they are associated with the "ball" (in FIG. 81(C), "1, 2, 3") is displayed. ”), the temporary stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81(D), while the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is being performed, the intermediate results associated with the "ball" are superimposed on the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. A corresponding image G62 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. circle) lights up. Immediately thereafter, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 disappear while being displayed again in a fluctuating manner (not shown), and the flow shifts to the next first special performance flow component (here, the second "missing shot").

In the first special effect flow component related to "missing", first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a scene in which a pitcher (main character) throws a ball to a batter is displayed (pitching scene). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a scene in which the batter makes a whiff is displayed (a whiff scene). Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a specific display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and the resultant numbers associated with "missing" (in FIG. 82(C), "1, 5, 4") are displayed. ”), the temporary stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 82(D), while the temporary stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is being performed, the intermediate results associated with "missing" are superimposed on the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. A corresponding image G62 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. circle) lights up. Immediately thereafter, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 disappear while being displayed again in a fluctuating manner (not shown), and the flow shifts to the next first special performance flow component (here, the third "reach").

In addition, in the pitching scenes related to "balls" and "missing shots," the pitcher (the main character) calmly throws his standard (basic) ball (non-scoring pitch) with normal pitching motions without spending too much time. ) to throw.

In the first special performance flow component related to "Reach", first, as shown in FIG. When the display section 50a is aligned, it slowly fades in from the upper end of the display section 50a and continues to descend. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 stop at approximately the center in the vertical direction, a reach is established, and the next first special performance flow component (here, , the fourth "foul"). In addition, when the reach is established, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the display section 50a while maintaining the reach.

In the first production flow component related to "foul," first, as shown in FIG. ). In addition, in the pitching scene related to a "foul", the pitcher (the main character) throws his favorite ball (successful pitch) with an exaggerated motion, taking longer than when pitching a "ball" or "whipping."

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a scene in which the batter swings the bat resulting in a foul ball is displayed (foul scene). When a foul scene is displayed as an animation, an intermediate result corresponding image G62 corresponding to "foul" is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(E). After a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. The circle on the right) lights up. Thereafter, the flow immediately shifts to the next first special performance flow component (here, the fifth "home run").

In the first performance flow component related to "Home Run", first, as shown in FIG. A scene in which the player throws a ball is displayed (successful pitch pitching scene). Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a scene in which the batter swings a bat and then a close-up of the ball and bat in close proximity is displayed (close-up scene of the ball and the bat). This close-up scene of the ball and bat constitutes a turning point between a small hit, a big hit, and a loss (win or loss turning point).

Then, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a scene in which the batter swings the bat and hits a home run is displayed (home run scene). Immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 84(D), the movable panel 55k is activated and is lowered and held at approximately the vertical center of the display section 50a when viewed from the front, and at the same time, the display section 50a An effect image G99 that effectively shows the operation of the panel movable body 55k is displayed on the entire screen of the display section 50a. The operation of the movable board 55k (including holding it in the lowered position) and the display of the effect image G99 are performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds).

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(E), the board movable body 55k returns to its original state, and the effect image G99 disappears on the display section 50a, and a scene in which the batter is happy is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 84(F). As shown in FIG. 3, performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 composed of three performance symbols G10 of the same type appear in a state approximately at the vertical center of the display section 50a and are completely stopped and displayed. This stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is carried out for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds). The end of the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is carried out in accordance with the end of the variable display of the special figure 2. Then, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 ends, a performance corresponding to the small winning game or the jackpot game is started.

In addition, the operation of the board movable body 55k (including holding it in the lowered position), the display of the effect image G99, and the display of the scene in which the batter is happy will notify a jackpot or small win that will not be executed in the case of a loss. Configure a performance (specific notification performance).

Next, a specific example of the first special effect will be explained using the first special effect pattern "TEP102" as an example. The first special performance of the first special performance pattern "TEP102" proceeds in the same way as the first special performance of the first special performance pattern "TEP002" until the middle (the first special performance flow component shifts). Specifically, the first special performance of the first special performance pattern "TEP102" progresses halfway with the same performance content as the first special performance of the first special performance pattern "TEP002" up to the winning/losing turning point. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a specific example of the fifth first special performance flow component "strikeout" in the first special performance pattern "TEP102". It is assumed that the first special effect of the first special effect pattern "TEP102" is started from an out count of "0".

In the first special effect flow component related to "strikeout", as shown in FIG. ) is displayed (successful pitch pitching scene). Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a scene in which the batter swings a bat and then a close-up of the ball and bat in close proximity is displayed (close-up scene of hole and bat). This close-up scene of the ball and bat constitutes a turning point between a small hit, a big hit, and a loss (win or loss turning point). Then, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a scene in which the bat hits the air and strikes out is displayed (strikeout scene). Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a scene in which the pitcher is happy is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 85(E), a count image G60 representing an out count of "0" is displayed on the display section 50a. The out count changes from "0" to "1" due to the strikeout, so as shown in FIG. The circle to the right of "O") lights up, and the ball count section and strike count section are reset. The end of the enlarged display of this count image G60 is performed in response to the end of the special figure 2 variable display. Since the out count is "1", the first special effect can be performed two more times, so when the enlarged display of the count image G60 is finished, the display position and size of the count image G60 are At the same time as returning, the next first special effect is started (not shown).

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, the second grand prize opening 15 is openable and closable, and when opened, a game ball can enter, and the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 15 passes through. It is equipped with a specific area 16 that is controlled into a possible specific state and an inaccessible non-specific state, and it is possible to perform a variable display of the special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol is derived by the variable display of the special figure 1. , it is possible to execute a jackpot game (special figure 1 jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and to execute a variable display of special figure 2, and when a small winning symbol is derived in the variable display of said special figure 2, a specific When the area 16 is controlled to a specific state and the game ball enters the specific area 16, a jackpot game (special pattern 2 jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and a special pattern 1 jackpot game and a special pattern 2 jackpot game are executed. Depending on the end of the game, it is possible to create a time-saving state in which the variable display of special figure 2 is easier to execute than in the normal game state, and a predetermined number of times ( In the first embodiment, if the small winning symbol is derived and the special figure 2 jackpot game is executed in the time saving state when the time saving state continues (twice in the first embodiment), the special drawing 2 jackpot game ends. Depending on what you do, you may be placed in a normal gaming state. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY1 is composed of a so-called ``one type and two type mixed machine'', and has a gaming feature in which the successive occurrence of time-saving states is limited to a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the so-called "1 type 2 type mixing machine", multiple jackpot games during which time-saving conditions continue to occur are treated as one jackpot game (set jackpot), giving the player a sense of security and satisfaction. In addition to providing a sense of excitement, the player can also gain a new experience and improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, when a small winning symbol is derived in the normal game state and a special pattern 2 jackpot game is executed, the first period can be continued (the prescribed number of times is 1 There are times when the game is in a time-saving state (disadvantageous gaming state), and times when it is in a time-saving state where it can continue for a second period longer than the first period (the prescribed number of time-savings is 99 times). If the time-saving state can be continued for a second period, the time-saving state will occur continuously a predetermined number of times again, and the possibility of executing a set jackpot consisting of multiple jackpot games will increase, so the game will become even more enjoyable. Interest improves. Furthermore, since it is possible to reserve the right to perform variable display of the special map 2 up to a predetermined number (four in the first embodiment), it is possible to continuously generate one set jackpot. This makes it possible to give the player an even greater sense of security and satisfaction, and improves his enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, in response to the end of a jackpot game, an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state may be entered, and after that, the jackpot determination is made in the normal gaming state. If a jackpot game is executed two or more predetermined times (in the first embodiment, two or three times) without being executed, the first jackpot game among the predetermined number of jackpot games is executed. In accordance with this, a specific display (prize ball number effect) representing the number of game media (game balls) that can be obtained in the predetermined number of jackpot games is executed on the display section 50a. Therefore, the predetermined number of jackpot games from once entering the advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) until dropping to the normal gaming state can be made to appear as a single jackpot game (set jackpot), which satisfies the player. Not only can this give a sense of excitement, but it also improves the interest in the game.

Further, in each jackpot game of the predetermined number of jackpot games, a specific display (prize ball number presentation) is executed on the display section 50a. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly about one big winning game (set jackpot), and the interest in the game is improved. Further, when the jackpot game is continuously executed a predetermined number of times without executing the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is set in response to the completion of the last jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make the entire game more interesting.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the gaming area 6 includes an electric chew opening/closing member 12k that can be switched between the first mode (closed mode) and the second mode (open mode), and the electric chew opening/closing member 12k in the normal mode (closed mode). ) and a specific mode (open mode) in which the game ball can enter more easily than the normal mode, and a second grand prize opening 15 that can be changed between the second grand prize opening 15 and a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 15 can pass. 16 is provided, and when a small winning game is executed in which the second large prize opening 15 is in a specific mode, and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player can be created. When the game ball that has passed the predetermined position (specific position When the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the time-saving state, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is less likely to enter the second mode than in the time-saving state. The game state is entered, and the small winning game has a small winning opening passive period and a small winning opening active period after the small winning opening passive period, and a second small winning opening passive period and a small winning opening passive period. The big winning opening 15 becomes a specific mode at least once, and the second big winning opening 15 becomes a specific mode during the small winning opening active period than the time when the second big winning opening 15 becomes the specific mode during the small winning opening passive period. The time it takes to become one is longer. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 during the small hit opening passive period, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is less likely to be in the second mode during the subsequent small winning opening active period. As a result, the game ball passes through a predetermined position and enters the second big prize opening 15 during the small winning opening active period where the time for the second big prize opening 15 to be in a specific mode is relatively long, and the game ball is further identified. Since the loss of the opportunity to pass through the area 16 can be suppressed, the disadvantage suffered by the player can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the small winning opening active period, when the second big prize opening 15 first changes to the specific mode and then changes to the normal mode, the normal mode is held for a longer time than the time of the first specific mode, so even if Even if a game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16 when the second big prize opening 15 is initially in the specific mode, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the second mode. Since it is possible to prevent the period during which players are playing from entering into the active period for opening small winnings, it is possible to further reduce the disadvantages suffered by the players. In addition, during the small hit opening passive period, the second big prize opening 15 becomes a specific mode at least twice, and the first specific mode is longer than the time of both the first specific mode and the second specific mode. The time of the normal mode after the mode and the time of the normal mode after the second specific mode are longer. Therefore, even if the game ball fails to enter the second grand prize opening 15 when the second grand prize opening 15 is in a specific mode for the first time, the second grand prize opening 15 When the game ball is in the specific mode, the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15, and further thereafter, the period during which the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is held in the second mode enters the small winning opening active period. Since it is possible to suppress the disadvantages suffered by the players, it is possible to further reduce the disadvantages suffered by the players. Furthermore, the time for the normal mode after the first specific mode is longer than the time for the normal mode after the second specific mode. Therefore, when the game ball is able to enter the second big winning hole 15 when the second big winning hole 15 is in a specific mode for the first time, the subsequent delay can be prevented. Furthermore, in the small winning opening active period, a unit operation in which the second big prize opening 15 in the normal mode changes to a specific mode and returns to the normal mode is executed multiple times, and the time period related to the unit operation is longer than the time of the specific mode related to the unit operation. The time of the normal mode is longer than the time of the normal mode related to unit operation, the time of the normal mode after the first specific mode in the first period, and the time of the normal mode after the second specific mode is longer. Therefore, if the game ball is able to enter the second big winning hole 15 when the second big winning hole 15 is in a specific mode for the first or second time, it is possible to prevent the subsequent delay. At the same time, it is possible to reduce waste caused by not being able to enter the second big prize opening 15 when game balls are continued to be launched during the small winning opening active period.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a specific condition that a game ball passes through the specific area 16 during execution of a small winning game is established, a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is created. , it is possible to execute a special performance during the small winning game that is related to the establishment of specific conditions during the execution of the small winning game, and if the specific condition is satisfied, the time saving prescribed number of times is 1 time (relatively short duration). In the case of a time-saving state, if a special effect during a small hit is executed in the first mode (the entire screen of the display unit 50a) and the specific conditions are met, the prescribed number of time-savings is 99 times (the duration is relatively long), which is advantageous. When the time is shortened, a small hit medium specifying performance is executed in a second mode (reduced screen 50g formed on the display section 50a) that is more difficult to recognize than the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player psychological leeway against being in an advantageous time-saving state where it is difficult to miss an opportunity for a specific condition to be met, and also to be at a disadvantage where it is easy to miss an opportunity for a specific condition to be met if one is not careful. By giving the impression that the time will be shortened, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to satisfy the specific condition from being missed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, when a specific condition is established that the game ball passes through the specific area 16 during execution of a small winning game, when the normal gaming state is entered, and when the player is in the normal gaming state, It is possible to execute a special effect during a small win related to the establishment of a specific condition during the execution of a small win game, and when the specific condition is satisfied, it becomes a normal game state, the first When a small hit medium specific performance is executed in the mode (the entire screen of the display section 50a) and a specific condition is met, the time saving state is achieved. A small hit medium specific effect is executed on the reduced screen 50g). Therefore, it is possible to give the player psychological leeway against being in an advantageous time-saving state where it is difficult to miss an opportunity for a specific condition to be met, and it is also possible to easily miss an opportunity for a specific condition to be met if the player is not careful. It is possible to give an impression that the game state will be entered, and to prevent the opportunity to satisfy the specific condition from being missed.

Furthermore, it is further provided with an operation means capable of operating the game ball to be fired, and the specific condition that the game ball passes through the specific area 16 during execution of the small winning game can be satisfied by the fired game ball. Yes, if the game ball is not fired in a small winning game, it will not be established. Therefore, the performance effect of the special performance during the small win is particularly improved when the specific condition is satisfied and the game enters the disadvantageous time saving state and when the game enters the normal game state.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, at a predetermined reference time, that is, when the special mode starts, in other words, when the special figure 2 variable display starts in the normal gaming state, a predetermined number of special figures 2 are reserved (in the first embodiment). , the second special performance can be executed when more than 4 pieces of special figures are on hold, and the second special effect can be executed when more than a predetermined number (4 pieces in the first embodiment) of special figures 2 pieces are on hold. do not execute. Therefore, the value of the second special performance can be improved, and the performance effect of the second special performance can be enhanced.

Furthermore, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number of special figures 2 (four in the first embodiment). That is, unless the special figure 2 reservation is accumulated to the upper limit value by the time a predetermined reference time arrives, the second special effect cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the value of the second special performance and enhance the performance effect of the second special performance. In addition, if a predetermined number (4 in the first embodiment) of special figure 2 reservations are accumulated at a predetermined standard time, the last special feature to be executed in the variable display of special figure 2 based on the special figure 2 reservations. The second special effect is executed while the variable display of FIG. 2 is being executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the second special performance can be further enhanced. Furthermore, if a predetermined number (4 in the first embodiment) of special figure 2 reservations are accumulated at a predetermined standard time, special figure 2 other than the last one among the variable displays of special figure 2 based on the special figure 2 reservations. It is possible to execute a first special effect different from the second special effect while the variable display of is being executed. Therefore, even when the variable display of the special figure 2 other than the last one is being executed, the player can be entertained and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, in the first special performance, a plurality of unit performances (constituent elements of the winning process: the batter's response to the pitcher's pitch) are repeatedly executed, and finally, the final As a result, the first result (strikeout) or the second result (home run) that suggests a higher possibility of a small hit or jackpot than the first result is derived, and in each unit performance, ultimately, A third result (strike) or a fourth result (ball) different from the first result and the second result is derived. Therefore, the third result and the fourth result are derived multiple times in one first special effect, making it possible for the player to feel as if he or she has had many chances. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

Furthermore, the first special performance is executed when the special figure 2 variable display is being executed, in which a small win or a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is derived, and a loss that is disadvantageous to the player is derived. Therefore, the performance effect of the first special performance can be improved. In addition, in the unit performance, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the first predetermined manner (display) in response to deriving the third result, and the performance symbols are displayed in the second predetermined manner (in response to deriving the fourth result). Since the unit performance may be stopped and displayed in order (order), it is possible to make the unit performance more sharp and to make the third and fourth results easier to understand, thereby improving the performance effect of the unit performance. Furthermore, the first special effect consists of a predetermined match (baseball match in one at-bat), the first result constitutes a loss (strikeout) related to the predetermined match, and the second result constitutes a victory related to the predetermined match. (home run), the unit effects constitute the intermediate process leading to victory and defeat related to a predetermined match, the third result indicates a loss-like content (missing) related to the predetermined match, and the fourth result indicates a content (ball) that is closer to victory in a predetermined match. Therefore, the performance effects of the first special performance and unit performance can be improved.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the first embodiment, the limiter related to the time saving state is set to two times, but this number is not limited to two times and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, although the limiter in the pachinko game machine PY1 is of one type, 2 times, there may be two or more types of limiters. In this case, the number of times related to the limiter may be set depending on the type of special figure.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, there are two types of specified number of time reductions, 1 time and 99 times, but the specific number and type of the specified number of time reductions are not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. You may change it.

Furthermore, the probability of winning a small hit in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 2 lottery is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. However, in the first embodiment, while the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4", the probability of winning a small hit in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 2 lottery is approximately "1/4". However, when the small winning probability is expressed as a fraction and the numerator is expressed as "1", it is desirable that the denominator approximates the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2. This is because it is possible to make the player excited and excited about winning a small win by setting the boundary between whether or not he or she can win a small win with the entire remaining reserve. In addition, as for the range of approximation in this case, it is preferable that the denominator part is about twice or less the upper limit value of the number of reserved special drawings 2, and 1/2 or more.

In addition, the number of round games related to jackpot games and set jackpots, the number of times the first big prize opening 14 is opened in each round game, and the opening time related to each opening, in other words, the number of prize balls expected to be acquired related to each jackpot game. may be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the ending time for the non-limiter jackpot games that make up the set jackpot is set to 0 seconds, in other words, the ending time is not performed in the non-limiter jackpot games that make up the set jackpot. , the ending time may be set to a time greater than 0 seconds. However, in this case, in order to treat multiple jackpot games as one jackpot game, it is desirable that the ending time for the non-limiter jackpot game is shorter than the ending time for the limiter jackpot game.

Further, in the first embodiment, the opening times for the jackpot games that constitute the set jackpot are all set to 10 seconds, but the opening times may be changed as appropriate. For example, there may be two or more opening times for jackpot games that constitute a set jackpot. Specifically, in order to treat multiple jackpot games as one jackpot game, the opening time of the first jackpot game that makes up a set jackpot is set to 10 seconds, and the opening time of the first jackpot game that makes up a set jackpot is set to 10 seconds. The opening time of the jackpot games other than the first that make up the set jackpot may be made shorter than the opening time of the first jackpot game that makes up the set jackpot, such as by setting the opening time to 2 seconds. Alternatively, in order to treat multiple jackpot games as one jackpot game, the opening time of jackpot games other than the first that constitute the set jackpot is 0 seconds, in other words, the opening time of the jackpot other than the first that constitutes the set jackpot. The opening may not be performed in the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, a plurality of jackpot games that are executed continuously and integrally are treated as one set jackpot, and a prize ball number effect is executed for the entire plurality of jackpot games. The plurality of jackpot games that are subject to the prize ball number performance are not limited to set jackpots, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, at the start of a certain jackpot game, if there is a special figure pending that includes a "jackpot" as a pre-read judgment result, and it is confirmed that multiple jackpot games will be executed. For such a plurality of jackpot games, a prize ball number presentation may be performed. Alternatively, the gaming states related to the probability of winning a jackpot include a normal probability state and a high probability state. If the specified number of times is 10,000, and it is practically likely that you will win a jackpot next time, the prize ball number effect will be executed for the two jackpot games, the first jackpot game and the subsequent jackpot game. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, the prize ball count presentation is displayed in a fractional format with the denominator of the number of prize balls to be acquired and the number of prize balls that have been acquired as the numerator, but the display format is not limited to the first embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. It's okay. Furthermore, the prize ball count presentation may be displayed using a different type of image than numbers, such as a bar graph or a line graph. Further, although the prize ball number presentation is executed on the image display device 50 that can display an image, the presentation device on which the prize pitch number presentation is executed is not limited to the first embodiment, and may include a dot matrix display, a 7-segment display device, etc. It may also be executed using other types of display devices such as a display device. Furthermore, in the prize ball number presentation, the number of awarded prize balls that have been acquired may not be displayed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the opening/closing manner of the second big prize opening 15 (the operating manner of the second AT opening/closing member 15k) and the opening/closing manner of the specific area 16 (the operating manner of the distribution member 16k) in the small winning game are also the same. The present invention is not limited to one embodiment, and may be modified as appropriate.

The opening/closing manner of the second big prize opening 15 includes the number of openings of the second big prize opening 15, the time required for each opening, the time required for closing after each opening, and the total opening time. For example, the second large winning opening 15 may be opened only once during the small winning opening passive period. Further, the opening of the second big prize opening 15 during the small winning opening active period may be set to 0.78 seconds in the first half and 0.78 seconds in the second half. In this case, the time required for closing between the first half opening and the second half opening in the small winning opening active period is the opening time of the second big prize opening 15 per unit time related to the small winning opening active period. It may be set as appropriate within a range that is longer than the opening time of the second grand prize opening 15 per unit time related to the passive period.

Furthermore, the opening/closing manner of the specific area 16 includes the number of openings of the specific area, the time required for each opening, the time required for closing after each opening, and the total opening time. For example, in the small winning opening passive period, the specific area 16 is considered as the time from when the game ball enters the second big winning opening 15 until it reaches the specific area 16 after the second big winning opening 15 is opened. The opening may be performed after the earliest possible time has elapsed. In addition, during the small hit release passive period, the specific area 16 is considered as the time from when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 15 until it reaches the specific area 16 after the second large winning opening 15 closes. It may be closed when the latest time allowed has elapsed.

Furthermore, the opening time and ending time related to the second big prize opening 15 are not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. However, it is desirable that the opening time is at least longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the second big prize opening 15 by firing the game ball after the start of the small winning game. This is to prevent the opportunity for the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 15 from being lost. In addition, in the first embodiment, the opening/closing manner of the second big prize opening 15 and the opening/closing manner of the specific area 16 in the small winning game when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal game state are different from the opening/closing manner of the small winning symbol in the time saving state. This is the same as the opening/closing manner of the second big prize opening 15 and the opening/closing manner of the specific area 16 in the small winning game when the icon is stopped and displayed, but they may be different. For example, in a small winning game related to the normal gaming state, the second big prize opening 15 is opened per unit time, like the small winning opening passive period and the small winning opening active period of the small winning game related to the time saving state. The second grand prize opening 15 may be simply opened for 1.8 seconds once without having a period based on time.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the jackpot game is executed when the condition that the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16 in the small winning game is established, but the A jackpot game may be executed when a condition other than passage is satisfied. For example, the specific condition may be that the number of game balls fired in a small winning game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 40 balls), or that the number of balls entered into the second big prize opening 15 in a small winning game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls). It may be set to reach a ball).

In addition, in the first embodiment, as the small winning medium specific performance executed in the small winning game, there is a first small winning medium specific performance that is executed briefly when there is a possibility of an unfavorable time saving state, and then an advantageous time saving. There is a second small hit medium specific performance that is carried out on a large scale when the situation is likely to occur, and the small hit medium specific performance includes a small hit medium right hitting promotion performance, a V winning promotion performance, and a V winning notification performance. However, depending on the type of time-saving state that may occur afterwards, whether the performance is carried out in a small way or on a large scale is determined by the small hit medium-right hit promotion performance, the V winning promotion performance, and the V winning promotion performance. It may also be part of the prize announcement performance. In other words, what is executed on the reduced screen 50g when there is a possibility of an advantageous time saving state after that may be a part of the small hit medium right hit promotion performance, the V winning promotion performance, and the V winning prize notification performance. Therefore, some of the first small hit medium-right hitting promotion image G50, the V winning prize promotion image G53, and the V winning notification image G54 are reduced screens on the display unit 50a, like the second small winning medium right hitting promotion image G51. It may be configured to be executed in a portion other than 50g.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the second small hit middle specific performance, the second small hit middle right hit promotion image G51 is executed in a part other than the reduced screen 50g in the display section 50a, Similarly to the center-right hitting promotion image G50, it may be reduced and executed on the reduced screen 50g.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the first small hit medium specific effect is executed on the reduced screen 50g formed in a part of the display section 50a, in other words, various images G50 related to the first small hit medium specific effect, By displaying G53 and G54 smaller than various images G50, G53, and G54 related to the second small winning medium specific effect, the first small winning medium specific effect becomes relatively small, that is, the second small winning medium specific effect. It is carried out in a less conspicuous manner. However, as a mode in which the first small hit medium winning specific performance is executed in a manner that is less conspicuous compared to the second small winning medium specific performance, it may be executed by a method other than reducing the size. For example, the first small hit medium specific performance is also executed on the entire screen of the display unit 50a like the second small hit medium specific performance, but the first small hit medium specific performance is executed with a transparency of 50%, and the second small hit medium specific performance is executed with a transparency of 50%. The transparency related to the first small winning medium specific performance may be made higher than the transparency related to the second small winning medium specific performance so that the small winning medium specific performance is executed with a transparency of 0%.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the second special performance can be executed only when the number of reserved special figures 2 is the upper limit of 4 pieces when the variable display of special figures 2 related to remaining reserves is started, For example, if there are three or more, in other words, there are a predetermined number smaller than the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2, it may be possible to execute. For example, if the upper limit of the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 8, and when the variable display of special drawings 2 related to the remaining reservations starts, the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 5 or more, which is 3 fewer than the upper limit. The second special performance may be made executable.

Furthermore, the second special performance is executed when the special figure 2 variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation in the reservation order 4 related to the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is being executed, but the execution timing is as follows. It is not limited to , and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the special mode, it is possible to display the hold icon in the basic embodiment or the relevant icon, and use the hold icon or the icon to display the special figure 2 hold when the special figure 2 variable display related to the remaining hold is started. An executable effect may be executed only when the number is the upper limit of four.

In addition, the out count related to the first special effect at the beginning in the special mode varies depending on the number of special figure 2 pending when the variable display of special figure 2 related to remaining pending starts, and after that, the out count related to the first special effect related to remaining pending is different depending on the number of special figure 2 pending Although the out count increases by one each time the variable display ends, the manner in which the out count changes is not limited to the first embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. For example, regardless of the number of special figure 2 reservations when the special figure 2 variable display related to remaining reservations starts, even if the number of special figure 2 reservations is 2 or less, the first 1 special performance may be started with an out count of "1", and thereafter, the out count may be increased by 2 in one special figure 2 variable display (first special performance). On the contrary, even in the special figure 2 variable display (first special performance) related to a loss, the out count may not increase.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the time-saving state ends by executing the specified number of time-saving variable display of special figure 2, the special figure confirmation time related to the last variable display of special figure 2 is different from the time-saving state. However, in this case, the time may be longer than the sum of the normal figure fluctuation time in the time saving state and the time required for the auxiliary game, such as 10 seconds, for example. This is to prevent the player from entering the second starting port 12 after entering the special mode, thereby causing inconsistency in the effects of the special mode.

Further, the presentation contents related to the first special presentation are not limited to those of the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the total of the final ball count and strike count in one first special performance, in other words, the total of intermediate results derived may be one or two. Moreover, although the intermediate result "foul" is derived only after a reach is established, it may be derived even before a reach is established. Alternatively, an intermediate result such as "ball" or "missing shot" may be derived after reaching is established. In this case, even after the reach is established, the specific display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 may be performed when the intermediate result "ball" or "missing shot" is derived, or the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 may be displayed. The specific display of EZ3 may not be performed.

Furthermore, in the first special effect, if the enemy character, the batter, hits a home run, it will result in a small hit or jackpot, and as the number of balls favorable to the batter increases, the expectation of a small or jackpot will increase, but if the main character, the pitcher, When the batter is struck out (when the batter strikes out or flies to left field), it becomes a small hit or a big hit, and as the number of strikeouts (strike) advantageous to the pitcher increases, the expectation of a small hit or a big hit may increase.

In addition, in the first embodiment, if a "strikeout" is derived, it will always be a loss, but after a "strikeout", a so-called "resurrection effect" may be executed and a jackpot or small win may occur. It's okay.

Further, although the presentation theme of the first special performance is a one-bat-bat confrontation in baseball, the presentation theme of the first special performance may be changed as appropriate. For example, a baseball tournament game is held throughout multiple first special performances, and the final result of each first special performance is the outcome of the game, and the intermediate results are the scores and points conceded. You may also do so. That is, the scale of the final result and intermediate results may be changed. Alternatively, the theme of the first special performance may be changed to a sport other than baseball.

Further, in the first embodiment, there are three types of special figure 2 variation patterns related to the first special performance associated with each jackpot determination result, but there may be two or less types, or four or more types. Further, the type of special figure 2 variation pattern may be different between the jackpot determination results. Further, in the first embodiment, a reach is always achieved in the first special performance, but a reach may not be achieved in some cases.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the intermediate result "foul" is derived, the specific display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is not performed, but the specific display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Also good. In this case, it may be possible to temporarily stop displaying the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are the same combination as the intermediate result "missing shot". Alternatively, it may be possible to temporarily stop displaying the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 which are composed of a different type of order from the intermediate result of "missing". Further, it may be possible to temporarily stop displaying the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a combination different from the normal order or the random order, such as descending order. Alternatively, specific display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may not be executed when intermediate results are derived.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the first special performance, after "ball" and "missing shot" are derived as animations related to the background image, specific displays of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are executed, and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed. While the EZ3 is displaying a temporary stop, intermediate result corresponding images G62 related to "ball" and "missing shot" are displayed, but the order of execution of these images is not limited to this and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when a specific display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed and production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 corresponding to "ball" or "missing" are temporarily stopped, "ball" or "ball" is displayed as an animation related to the background image. “Miss swing” may be derived, and an intermediate result corresponding image G62 related to “ball” or “Miss swing” may also be displayed. Alternatively, as an animation related to the background image, "ball" and "whimp" are derived, and then an intermediate result corresponding image G62 related to "ball" and "whip" is displayed, and then "ball" and "whip" are handled. A specific display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be executed. Further, as a component of the game process, the intermediate result corresponding image G62 may not be displayed. Alternatively, the specific display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be prevented from being executed as components of the game process.

Further, in the first special performance, a chance-up performance that indicates that the possibility of a big hit or a small win is increased by being executed may be made possible. A specific example of chance-up production will be explained. For example, when the first special effect is being executed, the display section 50a can display various special abilities related to the enemy character, the batter, and various types of special abilities related to the main character, the pitcher. do.

The display mode of the special ability is not particularly limited, and the special ability may be displayed with an icon representing the special ability, or with characters representing the special ability. Furthermore, the number of special abilities to be displayed can be set as appropriate. For example, as the number of special abilities displayed increases, the possibility of a big hit or a small win may increase. Furthermore, multiple timings at which the special ability is displayed on the display section 50a may be set. Furthermore, when a plurality of special abilities are displayed on the display section 50a, they may be displayed one by one as appropriate, or all or part of them may be displayed as appropriate. The special abilities displayed on the display section 50a are then stocked.

In addition, special abilities are abilities that the character has that can be utilized for batting or pitching, and the stocked special abilities develop according to the development of the animation displayed on the display section 50a. If the scene represented by the special ability is displayed while the special ability disappears (activates), the possibility of a big hit or a small hit increases. For example, special abilities related to batters include ball selection and stickiness, and special abilities related to pitchers include control and breaking balls. For example, when the special ability "ball selection eye" is stocked in the display section 50a, the special ability is activated, the batter sees off the ball, and the intermediate result "ball" is derived. Furthermore, when the special ability "Changing Ball" is stocked in the display section 50a, the special ability is activated, the pitcher throws a curve ball, and an intermediate result of "Miss Ball" is derived. In these cases, the special ability is stocked (displayed), and then the special ability is activated and a scene corresponding to the special ability is displayed in the animation, increasing the possibility of a big or small win. Ta. In other words, the chance-up effect has been executed.

Note that a plurality of timings may be set as the timing at which the stocked (displayed) special ability is activated, such as before a reach is established and after a reach is established. Furthermore, a plurality of stocked (displayed) special abilities may be activated at the same time. Further, it may be arranged so that the stocked (displayed) special ability may not be activated. In this case, the special ability displayed on the display section 50a may disappear at a specific timing such as a winning/losing point.

7. Inventions Disclosed in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions A to F are disclosed up to the previous paragraph in this [Detailed Description of the Invention]. In the description of Inventions A to Invention F, the names and expressions of corresponding components in the embodiments of the invention described above, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for inventions A1 to A3 below, invention B is a generic term for inventions B1 to B3 below, invention C is a generic term for inventions C1 to C5 below, and invention D is a generic term for inventions A1 to A3 below. , is a generic term for the following inventions D1 to D3, invention E is a generic term for the following inventions E1 to E4, and invention F is a generic term for the following inventions F1 to F4.

Furthermore, according to invention A, the effect of improving the interest in gaming is achieved with respect to problem 1 described below regarding the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2011-172741. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2011-172741, among the various specifications for gaming machines, one gaming machine has a specification called "Type 1 (so-called "DigiPachi type")". There is a game machine (so-called "1 type 2 type mixed machine") in which a specification called ``2nd type (so-called ``feather monotype'')'' is mixed. Regarding the part of the specification called the 1st type, a special drawing 1 lottery is held when a game ball enters the first starting slot, and if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing, you will be drawn into the first jackpot. A jackpot game that is released is executed. On the other hand, for the part of the specification called the second type, a special drawing 2 lottery is held when a prize is won in the second starting slot, and if you win a small win in the special drawing 2 drawing, you will first be able to enter a specific area inside. (so-called "V zone") operates for a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and a small winning game in which the second big prize opening is opened is executed. When the game ball enters this specific area, a jackpot game is executed in which the second jackpot is opened. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that have a mixture of specifications referred to as type 1 and specifications referred to as type 2, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, the first objective is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Moreover, according to invention B, the effect of improving the interest in gaming is achieved with respect to problem 2 described below regarding the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181254. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-181254, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as a jackpot in the judgment, a jackpot that can acquire game media is generated. The game is executed. Then, when a jackpot game is being executed, the number of game media that can be obtained in the jackpot game may be displayed. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that sometimes display the number of game media that can be obtained, in order to improve the game's interest. Therefore, the second problem is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Further, according to invention C, there is an effect that the disadvantage to the player is reduced regarding problem 3, which will be explained next regarding the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181254. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-181254, a game is played by firing a game ball toward a gaming area. The gaming area is provided with a variable starting opening that can be opened and closed, a large winning opening that can be opened and closed, and the like. In addition, the gaming area may be provided with a specific area that is controlled in such a manner that the game ball that enters the grand prize opening when the grand prize opening is open can pass through and in a manner that it cannot pass through. By the way, pachinko gaming machines have various gaming features, and among them, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2019-181254, a grand prize opening opens in a specific game, and during the opening, the grand prize opening opens. When the game ball enters the area and passes through a specific area, the game state may become advantageous to the player. However, the arrangement of the variable starting hole and the big winning hole, and the way the variable starting hole and the big winning hole are opened vary. For example, the variable starting hole is provided upstream of the big winning hole, and the variable starting hole is opened. This may prevent the game ball from entering the jackpot. In this case, even though the player was able to execute the specific game, the game ball may not be able to pass through the specific area, which may put the player at a disadvantage. Therefore, the third issue is to provide a new gaming machine that reduces disadvantages for players.

Further, according to invention D, the game machine described in JP-A No. 2011-172741 has the effect of improving the interest in playing the game in response to problem 4 described below. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2011-172741, when you win a small win in the special lottery, first the big prize opening that has a specific area (so-called "V zone") inside is opened for a short time (for example, 1.5 second), and a small winning game in which the big prize opening is opened is executed. When the game ball passes through this specific area, a game state becomes advantageous to the player. Further, when a small winning game is being executed, a message is displayed to change the left-handed game that has been played so far to a right-handed game. The display of this message functions as an effect regarding the fulfillment of a specific condition for achieving a gaming state advantageous to the player. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the game's interest in gaming machines that may execute performances related to the fulfillment of specific conditions for achieving a gaming state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the fourth problem is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to invention E, there is an effect of improving the interest in playing the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2019-181254 in response to problem 5 described below. In the gaming machine described in JP 2019-181254A, it is possible to perform a variable display of special symbols, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol, a gaming state advantageous to the player is created. If the right to execute the variable display of special symbols is obtained in a situation where variable display of the special symbols cannot be started, the right is reserved and the variable display of the special symbols related to the reserved right cannot be started. When the conditions that allow this are established, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. By the way, when a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state, ends, the right to perform a variable display of special symbols may be reserved, and the reserved right may be used to perform special effects. There are things to do. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the game's interest in gaming machines that sometimes execute special effects using the right to display variable displays of special symbols that have been reserved. Therefore, problem 5 is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming interest.

In addition, according to invention F, there is an effect of improving the interest in playing the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181254 with respect to problem 6 described below. In the gaming machine described in JP 2019-181254A, it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. Ru. Then, when the variable display of special symbols is being executed or when the jackpot game is being executed, various effects are executed. For example, when a variable display of special symbols is being executed, a production (reach production) in which predetermined characters confront each other is executed, and if the first result (defeat) is derived in the confrontation, the jackpot game will not be executed. , the jackpot game is executed when a second result (win) indicating that the possibility of executing the jackpot game is higher than the first result is derived. However, in order to improve gaming enjoyment for gaming machines that may perform effects that derive a first result or a second result that suggests a higher possibility of an advantageous gaming state than the first result. There is still room for improvement. Therefore, problem 6 is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming interest.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to invention A1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
A variable winning area (second grand prize opening 15) that can be opened and closed and into which game balls can enter when opened;
A specific area (specific area 16) that is controlled to have a specific state in which the game ball that has entered the variable winning area can pass through and a non-specific state in which it cannot pass,
The game control means is
It is possible to perform a variable display of the first identification information (special figure 1), and when the first specific result (stop display of jackpot symbols) is derived by the variable display of the first identification information, a first identification result advantageous to the player is obtained. 1 Execute an advantageous game (jackpot game),
It is possible to perform a variable display of the second identification information (special figure 2), and when a second specific result (stop display of small winning symbols) is derived by the variable display of the second identification information, the specific area is In a gaming machine that is controlled in a specific state and executes a second advantageous game (small winning game) that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area,
The game control means is
In response to the completion of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game, it is possible to create a time-saving state in which variable display of the second identification information is more likely to be executed than in a normal state,
The second specific result is derived in the time-saving state when the time-saving state is continuously entered a predetermined number of times (twice) with the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game in between, and the second specified result is derived and the second advantageous game is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that when a game is executed, the normal state is set in response to the completion of the second advantageous game.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to invention A1,
When the second specified result is derived and the second advantageous game is executed in the normal state, the game control means controls the time saving state in which the second advantageous game can be continued for a first period in response to the end of the second advantageous game. (an unfavorable time-saving state) and a time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that can be continued for a second period longer than the first period.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to invention A1 or invention A2,
The game control means is
When a predetermined condition is met, variable display of the second identification information can be performed,
If the predetermined condition is met but the variable display of the second identification information cannot be started, the right to variable display of the second identification information may be reserved up to a predetermined number (4 pieces). A gaming machine characterized by being able to play.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to invention B1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of executing a specific game (big win game) that can obtain game media (game balls) when a specific result (big hit, small win) is obtained in a predetermined determination (big hit determination);
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of displaying predetermined information on a display unit (display unit 50a),
The game control means may set an advantageous game state (time saving state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state in response to the end of a specific game;
The effect control means executes, in one specific game, a specific display (prize ball number effect) representing the number of game media that can be obtained in multiple specific games including the one specific game on the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the performance control means may execute the specific display on the display section in each of the plurality of specific games.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2,
The game control means is configured to continuously play a game a predetermined number of times without executing the predetermined determination in the normal game state after entering the advantageous game state (time saving state) in accordance with the end of a predetermined specific game. When the specific game is executed with the specific result in the last advantageous gaming state when the advantageous gaming state is entered, the normal gaming state is set and the predetermined A gaming machine characterized in that, in a specific game, the display unit may display the specific display indicating the number of game media that can be acquired in the specific game that can be executed until the normal gaming state is reached.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling the game;
A variable means (electric chew opening/closing member 12k) that can be switched between the first mode and the second mode is provided in the gaming area, and a specific mode that allows the game ball to enter more easily than the normal mode and the normal mode. A changeable variable winning area (second big winning opening 15) and a specific area (specific area 16) through which the game ball that has entered the variable winning area can pass are provided,
The game control means executes a specific game (small winning game) in which the variable winning area is in the specific mode, and when a game ball passes through the specific area in the specific game, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player ( In gaming machines that may enter jackpot gaming state, time saving state),
A game ball that has passed a predetermined position in the game area (a position where the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is installed) can enter the variable winning area,
The variable means may prevent the game ball from passing through the predetermined position when held in the second mode,
When the game ball passes through the specific area in a predetermined gaming state (time saving state), the variable means enters a specific gaming state (normal gaming state) in which it is less likely to be in the second mode than in the predetermined gaming state;
The specific game has a first period (a passive period for opening small winnings) and a second period (active period for opening small winnings) after the first period, and in the first period and the second period. The variable winning area is in the specific mode at least once, and the time in which the variable winning area is in the specific mode in the second period is longer than the time in which the variable winning area is in the specific mode in the first period. A gaming machine characterized by its long length.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
In the first period, when the variable winning area first changes to the specific mode and then changes to the normal mode, the normal mode lasts for a longer time (2. 5 seconds).

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2,
In the first period, the variable winning area is in the specific mode at least twice, and the time period (0.12 seconds) of both the first specific mode and the second specific mode is longer. The time of the normal mode after the first specific mode (2.5 seconds) and the time of the normal mode after the second specific mode (1.5 seconds) are longer. A gaming machine.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to invention C3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the time of the normal mode after the first specific mode is longer than the time of the normal mode after the second specific mode.

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to invention C4,
In the second period, a unit operation in which the variable winning area in the normal mode changes to the specific mode and returns to the normal mode is executed a plurality of times (13 times), and the time period (0 .12 seconds), the time of the normal mode related to the unit operation (0.6 seconds) is longer,
The time of the normal mode after the first specific mode in the first period and the time of the normal mode after the second specific mode in the first period are longer than the time of the normal mode related to the unit operation. A gaming machine characterized by a long period of time.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
If a specific condition (passage of the game ball through the specific area 16) is met during the execution of a specific game (small winning game), an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) may be created that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101),
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance (specific performance during a small hit) related to the establishment of the specific condition,
If the specific condition is satisfied while the specific game is being executed, the advantageous gaming state (disadvantageous time saving state) that can be continued for the first period is entered, the predetermined effect is displayed in the first mode (the entire screen of the display unit 50a). If the specific condition is satisfied while the specific game is being executed, the advantageous gaming state (advantageous time saving state) that can be continued (a second period longer than the first period) is reached, the first A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined performance is executed in a second mode (reduced screen 50g) that is more difficult to recognize than the mode.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
When a specific condition (passage of the game ball through the specific area 16) is satisfied during execution of a specific game (small winning game), a normal gaming state is established, and an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) that sometimes enters a state (time saving state);
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance (specific performance during a small hit) related to the establishment of the specific condition,
If the specific condition is satisfied while the specific game is being executed and the normal gaming state is entered, the predetermined effect is executed in the first mode (the entire screen of the display section 50a), and the specific game is executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specific condition is satisfied when the game enters the advantageous gaming state, the predetermined performance is executed in a second mode (reduced screen 50g) that is more difficult to recognize than the first mode.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1 or invention D2,
It further includes an operation means (handle 72k) that can be operated to launch the game ball,
A game machine characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied by a game ball being fired, and is not satisfied if a game ball is not fired in the specific game.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is
Based on the fact that a specific result (stop display of jackpot symbols, stop display of small win symbols) is derived by variable display of identification information (special figure 2), an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is created. A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of
Equipped with a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing the performance,
The game execution means satisfies the second condition (end of the variable display of the special drawing 2 related to loss) after the first condition (winning into the second starting opening 12 when the number of reserved special drawings 2 is less than 4) is satisfied. A gaming machine capable of variably displaying the identification information by:
The game execution means may reserve the right to execute variable display of the identification information based on the satisfaction of the first condition when the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied. can be,
The performance execution means executes a predetermined performance (second special performance) when a predetermined number (4) or more of the rights are reserved at a predetermined standard time (start time of special figure 2 variable display related to remaining reservation). A gaming machine that is capable of executing the predetermined effect and does not execute the predetermined performance when the predetermined number or more of the rights are not reserved.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game execution means can reserve the rights up to the predetermined number.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to invention E2,
When the predetermined number of rights are reserved at the predetermined reference time, the performance execution means is configured to perform display execution when the last variable display of the identification information among the variable displays of the identification information based on the right is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the predetermined performance.

8-5-4. Invention E4
The gaming machine according to invention E4 is
A gaming machine according to invention E3,
The performance execution means executes a variable display of the identification information other than the last among the variable displays of the identification information based on the right, when the predetermined number of rights are reserved at the predetermined reference time. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to sometimes execute a specific performance (first special performance) different from the predetermined performance.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to invention F1 is
A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) that can create an advantageous gaming state (jackpot gaming state, time saving state) advantageous to the player;
Equipped with a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing the performance,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance (first special performance),
In the predetermined performance, a unit performance (component of the winning process) is repeatedly executed a plurality of times, and finally, the final result is the first result (strikeout/loss) or the game that is more advantageous than the first result. A second result (home run/big hit/small hit) suggesting that the condition is likely to occur is derived,
The gaming machine is characterized in that in each of the unit performances, a third result (strikeout) or a fourth result (ball) that is different from the first result and the second result is finally derived.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
The game execution means is capable of variably displaying the identification information, and the variable display of the identification information indicates a specific result (stop display of a jackpot symbol, stop display of a small winning symbol) or a non-specific result (stop display of a losing symbol). display) and deriving the specific result may result in the advantageous gaming state;
The gaming machine characterized in that the performance execution means may execute the predetermined performance when the variable display of the identification information is being executed.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F2,
The performance execution means may execute a variable display of performance symbols (performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3) in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and in the variable display of the performance design, a specific mode according to the specific result. There are times when the performance symbol is stopped and displayed in a (Zero), and there are times when the performance symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-specific manner (Rake-to-Go, Lost-to-Reach) according to the non-specific result.
In the unit performance, in response to deriving the third result, the performance pattern is stopped and displayed in a first predetermined manner (display pattern), and in response to derivation of the fourth result, the performance pattern is displayed in a second manner. A game machine characterized in that it may stop and display in a predetermined manner (order).

PY, PY1... Pachinko gaming machine 1... Game board 6... Game area 6A... Left gaming area 6B... Right gaming area 11... First starting port 11a... First starting port sensor 12... Second starting port 12a... Second starting port Sensor 12k...Electric chew opening/closing member 13...Gate 14...First big winning opening 14a...First big winning opening sensor 14k...First AT opening/closing member 15...Second winning opening 15a...Second big winning opening sensor 15k...Second AT Opening/closing member 16...specific area 16a...specific area sensor 16k...distribution member 50...image display device 50a...display section 52...speaker 53...frame lamp 100...game control board 101...game control microcomputer 120...effect control board 121... Production control microcomputer 140...image control board

Claims (1)

a game control means capable of executing a specific game in which game media can be obtained when a specific result is obtained in a predetermined determination;
A gaming machine comprising an effect control means capable of displaying predetermined information on a display section,
The game control means is
Depending on the end of a specific game, an advantageous gaming state may be created that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
When the advantageous gaming state is entered a predetermined number of times consecutively without the predetermined determination being executed in the normal gaming state after entering the advantageous gaming state in response to the end of a predetermined specific game. When the specific game is executed with the specific result in the last advantageous gaming state, the normal gaming state may be changed in response to the completion of the specific game,
The performance control means is
In each of the predetermined number of specific games executed before the predetermined specific game and the subsequent normal gaming state, the predetermined specific game and the subsequent specific games executed before the normal gaming state Executing a specific display on the display unit representing a predetermined number of specific games and the total number of game media that can be obtained;
A game characterized in that the total number of game media represented by the specific display executed in the predetermined specific game and in each of the predetermined number of specific games executed until the normal gaming state is reached is the same. Machine.

Images